JP6937041B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Conventionally, there is widely known a game table that performs a setting change process in which a set value can be changed and shifts to a normal gaming state after the process is completed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-20302

However, since the conventional game console can complete the setting change process at an arbitrary timing of the operator, there is a problem that it becomes easy to specify the process timing related to the profit of the player in the normal game state after the transition. There is.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table capable of preventing fraudulent acts.

The game console according to the present invention is a game console including a notification means capable of performing notification, a main control means capable of executing a plurality of types of processing, and a sub-control means capable of controlling the notification means. One of the plurality of types of processes is a process related to activation of the sub-control means (hereinafter, referred to as "first process"), and one of the plurality of types of processes is the above-mentioned process. It is a process started after the first process, and is a process of transmitting a command related to the start start of the sub-control means to the sub-control means (hereinafter, referred to as "second process"). One of the plurality of types of processes is a process that is started after the second process when the power is turned on in a state where the set value can be changed, and is a process related to the setting (hereinafter referred to as a process). , "Third process"), and one of the plurality of types of processes is a process started after the third process, and is a plurality of types of processes including a lottery process. It is a process composed of (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth process"), and the sub-control means notifies the third process (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain notification" based on the command related to the start of activation). The third process is a process that ends when a certain operation is received, and the fourth process is the third process. processing der the process is started when a certain period ends has elapsed is, one processing among the plurality of types of processing, updates the random number used in the lottery process in the fourth process The game table is characterized in that it is a process to be performed (hereinafter, referred to as a “fifth process”), and the fifth process is a process started before the third process.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table capable of preventing fraudulent activities.

It is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol mode of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure is shown. It is a schematic diagram explaining the command processing which concerns on embodiment of this invention. (A) It is a block diagram explaining the communication process of a main control part and a payout control part. (B) It is a block diagram explaining the serial communication circuit. (C) It is a block diagram explaining the flow of serial communication of a main control part and a payout control part. It is a block diagram of various registers included in a serial communication-related register, and the figure which showed the contents of various registers. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation state of each control part with the timing of power-off and supply. (B) It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation state of each control part at the time of power-off. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the setting process at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of RAM error confirmation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the power-on mode confirmation process. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the communication abnormality | processing in the main control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the sub-start waiting wait processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a setting management process. It is a time chart which shows the flow of various processing executed from the power-on to the start of a normal game in the initial start-up or the return start-up. It is a time chart which shows the flow of various processing executed from the power-on to the start of a normal game in setting change or setting confirmation. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command management process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a serial command reception process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the serial command transmission processing. (B) This is an example of a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prize ball command setting process. It is a figure which showed an example of the change of the prize ball number in the prize ball number storage area 308a-308d (a)-(c). (D) It is a figure which showed an example of the prize ball command table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the device monitoring processing in the main control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of communication abnormality monitoring processing. It is a time chart which showed an example of communication abnormality processing in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of RAM. It is a schematic diagram which shows the area where the RAM is initialized and the timing thereof. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is a flowchart of the main process executed by a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the payout control part interrupt processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the reception command processing. (B) It is a flowchart which shows another example of the received command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a command analysis process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing at the time of receiving a main control communication confirmation command. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the start-up process. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process at the time of receiving a prize ball command. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process at the time of receiving a prize ball command. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of error management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of transmission command processing. It is a figure which showed the modification 1 of the transmission command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing at the time of receiving a main control communication confirmation command. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of transmission command processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the received command buffer area. It is a figure which shows an example of the received command buffer area. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a part of the storage area used in the received command processing, the received command acquisition process, and the received command analysis process. (B) It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a part of the storage area used in the received command processing, the received command acquisition process, and the received command analysis process. (C) It is a figure which shows an example of the received command. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the received command processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the received command acquisition processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the received command analysis processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the received command analysis processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the received command analysis processing. (A) It is a block diagram which showed an example of the connection between control boards. (B) (c) is a block diagram showing another example of connection between control boards. It is a block diagram which showed another example of the connection between control boards. (A) The main terminals included in the payout control microcomputer 770 are illustrated. (B) It is a figure (partial excerpt) which showed the connection between a payout control microcomputer 770 and an external device (IC). It is the figure which showed an example of the main command. It is a figure which showed the connection example of a main board, a payout board, an external terminal board, and an external device (hall computer). (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the external terminal board signal which is output from a main board. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the external terminal board signal output from a payout board. (A) This is a connection example in which the arrangement of the main board and the payout board is reversed with respect to the connection example shown in FIG. 55. (B) This is a connection example in which both the main board and the payout board are directly connected to the external terminal board. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the external output signal setting processing in the main control part timer interrupt processing. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the mask processing of the external output signal information in step S306. It is a figure which showed the modification 1 of the external output signal setting processing. It is a figure which showed the modification 2 of the external output signal setting processing. It is a figure which showed an example of the terminal arrangement of the payout control microcomputer 770. (A) It is a figure which showed the data structure of the output port 1 register for outputting the data of a parallel output port POP1. (B) It is a figure which showed the output pattern at the time of output through a 7SEG decoder. (C) It is a figure which showed the correspondence relationship of each segment of an output terminal POP10-POP16 and an LED. It is a figure which showed the relationship between the error name, the LED display (LED lighting pattern), the state of an error display LED, and the state of a payout display LED. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the timer used by the payout control microcomputer 770. (B) It is a figure which showed a part of the storage area of the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 770. (A) It is a figure which showed an example of the error which can be detected by the payout control microcomputer 770. , (B) is a diagram showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which are conditions for generating a door opening error. It is a figure which showed an example of the payout control command. It is a figure (b to e) which showed the example (a) of the transmission command output request information used when executing the transmission command processing, and the data structure of some payout control commands. It is a flowchart which showed the flow of the payout control part interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a device monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a port output process. (A) It is a time chart which showed an example of the transmission timing from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 when the firing intensity changeover switch signal is on. (B) It is a time chart which showed an example of the transmission timing from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 when the firing intensity changeover switch signal is off. It is a time chart which showed an example of the transmission timing from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. It is a figure which showed the timing chart of the communication example 1 of the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600, and an example of the change of a variable at a predetermined timing. (A) It is an enlarged view of the time chart at the time of sending a prize ball command. (B) It is an enlarged view of the time chart of the period shown in t3 of FIG. 75. (A) This is an example of a time chart when a plurality of winnings at the starting port or the winning opening are detected in one main control unit timer interrupt process. (B) It is a time chart which shows the modification of the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600. It is a time chart which shows the output example 1 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 2 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 3 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 4 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 5 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 6 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 7 of an external terminal board signal. It is a time chart which shows the output example 8 of an external terminal board signal. It is a figure which shows the example of the power supply between the power supply board 182, the payout board 170, and the main board 156 which concerns on Embodiment 3. It is a figure which shows the example of the power supply in the main board 156. It is a figure which shows the example of the power supply in a power supply board 182 and a main board 156. It is a figure which shows the example of the power supply in the main board 156. It is a figure which shows an example of the received command buffer area. It is a figure which shows an example of the received command buffer area. (A) It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a part of the storage area used in the received command processing, the received command acquisition process, and the received command analysis process. (B) It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a part of the storage area used in the received command processing, the received command acquisition process, and the received command analysis process. (C) It is a figure which shows an example of the received command. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the received command processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the received command acquisition processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the received command analysis processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the received command analysis processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the received command analysis processing. (A) An example of a low-probability state table (Special Figure 1) for determining whether or not a special figure is correct is shown. (B) An example of a high-probability state table (Special Figure 1) for determining whether or not a special figure is correct is shown. (C) shows an example of a low-probability state table (special figure 2) for determining whether or not a special figure is correct. (D) shows an example of a high-probability state table (special figure 2) for determining whether or not a special figure is correct.

<Embodiment 1>
Hereinafter, the game console (pachinko machine 100) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 50. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop. The main body 104 is called an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The game area 124 is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 by the operation of the player, a chance button lamp 138 that emits the chance button 136, and a game store. A ball lending operation button 140 that gives an instruction to lend a ball to the installed card unit (CR unit), a return operation button 142 that gives an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit, and a player's balance and a card. It is provided with a ball rental display unit 144 that displays the state of the unit. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

<Back of the game console>
FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate the sprocket by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls, and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk. Power is supplied to the payout board case 172 that houses the payout board 170 including 168, the launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to the launch of the game ball, and various electrical game devices. A power supply board including a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating 182 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are arranged.

Hereinafter, the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 may be referred to as the main control board 156, and the payout board 170 constituting the payout control unit 600 may be referred to as the payout control board 170. The main control board 156 and the payout control board 170 are configured as separate boards.

<Front of the game table>
FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The effect device 206 operates the effect movable body 224 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later. The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and in this embodiment, it is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, it does not have to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (Electro Liquid Crystal) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in this embodiment, they are composed of 7-segment LEDs.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure changing games (details will be described later) being held, and in this embodiment, the special figure changing game is performed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is in a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state. Turns on when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Further, around the effect device 206, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting port 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, and a second special drawing starting port 232. A variable winning opening 234 is arranged.

In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). (When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". Then, it is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged in. The ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of balls into the first special figure start port 230, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls in the upper plate 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in this embodiment, only one is arranged directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special drawing start port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the blade member 232a is closed. When the 210 hits and the symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, only one is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member 234a is closed. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning openings or starting openings to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the hammer 146. And the launching mallet 148 passes the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and launches them into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), or without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. .. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200, or the like can be rolled, and a passing ball is placed in the center of the stage 244 in the first special drawing start port 230. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the ball.

In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm portion 224a to the shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-like left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is.

Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice to be visible from the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portion of the holes in the lattice may be closed with a semi-transparent lens body to the rear. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the obstacle portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely closed (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that mainly controls the progress of the game (for example, detection of an operation by the player, transition of the game state, payout control of the game medium, hit / miss determination, etc.). , The first sub-control unit 400 that mainly controls the effect according to the command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. A second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the above, a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of the game ball in response to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a launch that controls the launch of the game ball. It is composed of a control unit 630 and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and data temporarily. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400, which will be described later. Also, RAM is sometimes referred to as RWM. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 is a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received (two in this circuit). (It is assumed that a counter is built-in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, a front frame door opening sensor, and an inner frame opening sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a counter circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device. For example, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a drive circuit for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general figure display device 210. Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of 326 and various status display units 328 (for example, normal figure holding lamp 216, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) And a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that open and close a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the like are connected.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the register. Further, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the counter circuit 318 also latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232. , The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinkos the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (details will be described later).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 issues commands to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured so that signals can be transmitted, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various production data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, number of times, etc. The counter timer 412 of the above is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a cloaking device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a cloaking device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the cloaking device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, a cloaking device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor. The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404, and the like are read out, and the work area of the VRAM 436 is used to generate a display image for decoration. A VDP434 (video display processor) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208 is connected to the symbol display device 208.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program, data, and an image display for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500. A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. 518, a sensor circuit 518 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game board frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542. A circuit 540, a serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout is completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to the 630, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device by another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained. FIG. 3A shows an example of a stop symbol mode of the special figure.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first special figure start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232. 2 The variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". conduct. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variable display of the symbol according to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of No. 2 (which also corresponds to the fluctuation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variation display of the special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, or after the start of the "variation display of the special figure 2", the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 is displayed. The period up to the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, and hereinafter, the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of displays up to is called the symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be performed a plurality of times in succession. In the figure (a), 10 types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display, and the white part in the figure is turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the location of the segment where the black part is lit is shown.

"Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the time is shortened. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state, and the state of not shifting to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "special figure A" is in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the 15R big hit symbol "special figure B" is in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. These "special figure A" and "special figure B" are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively large amount of profit.

"Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure C" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure D" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure B" which is 15R.

"Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Both "Special Figure E" and "Special Figure F" are 2R and do not shift to the time saving state.

"Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, and "special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit without 2R time reduction. That is, the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", but the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is different between the two, and even in the same state, the "special figure" is intentionally displayed. By providing "G", "Special Figure H" and "Special Figure F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

Further, "Special Figure I" is the first out-of-line symbol, and "Special Figure J" is the second out-of-line symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "Special Figure A" is also prepared as a 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, or On condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special symbol starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208. In each symbol display area of area 208c, "decoration 1"-> "decoration 2"-> "decoration 3"-> ... "decoration 9"-> "decoration 10"-> "decoration 1"-> ... is displayed in this order. Perform "variable display of decorative pattern" to switch. Then, in the case of notifying the 15R jackpot of "special figure B", a symbol combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") 1 ”and“ Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", a combination of three patterns of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" "Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the 2R jackpot called "Hidden Probability Change" of "Special Figure E", the sudden 2R jackpot called "Special Figure F", or the first small hit of "Special Figure G", "Special Figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying the 2R jackpot called "special figure C" sudden change or the 2R jackpot called "special figure D" sudden time reduction, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is used. Stop display. On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of the "special figure I" and the second deviation of the "special figure J", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in the figure (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 5C shows an example of a stop display symbol of a normal diagram. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "variable display of general map". Then, "Fu-zu A" is stopped and displayed when notifying the winning of the Furu-zu fluctuating game, and "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed when notifying the deviation of the Furu-zu fluctuating game. Also in this figure (c), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

<Processing of commands sent from the main control unit to the payout control unit>
FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing processing of a command transmitted from the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment to the payout control unit 600.

As shown in the figure, the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are electrically connected via a serial communication line, and when the command transmission condition is satisfied, the main control unit 300 is the payout control unit 600. Send the specified command to. Then, the payout control unit 600 performs at least a process of temporarily storing the received command (prior to the analysis of the command) in the storage means (for example, RAM) and a process of analyzing the command stored in the storage means. ..

That is, as shown in the figure, when a plurality of commands (command 1, command 2) are transmitted from the main control unit 300 that performs the first process to the payout control unit 600 that performs the second process, command 1, Both of the commands 2 are stored in RAM or the like, and then the stored commands 1 and 2 are analyzed. For example, even if command 2 is a normal command but command 1 is an invalid command, any command is temporarily stored in RAM or the like. After that, the command analysis process is performed, the invalid command 1 is discarded, the normal command 2 is not discarded, and the process corresponding to the command (second process) is executed.

<Serial communication between main control unit and payout control unit>
The serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 7.

FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 7A is a schematic block diagram of the serial communication circuit, and FIG. 2B is a schematic block diagram. Is a block diagram illustrating registers related to serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600. Further, FIG. 7C is a block diagram illustrating a flow of serial communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600.

Explaining with reference to FIG. 3A, the pachinko machine 100 is for a main control unit microcomputer (microprocessor) 760 capable of at least executing game control and a payout control unit capable of at least executing prize ball giving control. It has a microcomputer (microprocessor) 770. The microcomputer 760 for the main control unit is mounted on the main control board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300, and the microcomputer for the payout control unit is the payout control board 170 (what is the main control board 156) that constitutes the payout control unit 600. It is mounted on another board). The microcomputer 760 for the main control unit and the microcomputer 770 for the payout control unit have built-in serial communication circuits 750 and 752 shown in FIG. be able to.

The microcomputer 760 for the main control unit has, for example, a status register 762, a reception data register 764, a transmission data register 766, and other registers 768 as registers for serial communication. Further, the main control unit microcomputer 760 includes a CPU core register 710 including general-purpose registers (A register 712, HL register (pair register) 714, other registers 716, etc.), ROM 306, RAM (buffer) 308, and the like.

The microcomputer 770 for the payout control unit has, for example, a status register 772, a reception data register 774, a transmission data register 776, and other registers 778 as registers for serial communication.

Further, the payout control unit microcomputer 770 includes a CPU core register 720 including general-purpose registers (A register 722, HL register (pair register) 724, other registers 726, etc.) as general-purpose registers (storage areas), ROM 706, and RAM. (Buffer area) 708 and the like are provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6A, a RAM (buffer area) 708 is provided in the storage area (first storage area), and the CPU core register 720 is provided in the other storage area (second storage area). Is provided, and a receive data register 774 and a transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 are provided in another storage area (third storage area).

The receive data register 764 and the transmission data register 766 of the microcomputer 760 for the main control unit may be one transmission / reception data register. Further, the reception data register 774 and the transmission data register 776 of the microcomputer 770 for the payout control unit may be one transmission / reception data register.

As shown in FIG. 3B, the serial communication circuits 750 and 752 have built-in 4-channel (Ch0, Ch1, Ch2, Ch3) circuits. All channels are functionally independent, and there are channels that have a transmitter and a receiver and can transmit and receive, and channels that have only a transmitter and can only transmit. A channel (Ch0) capable of transmitting and receiving is used for serial communication between the microcomputer 760 for the main control unit and the microcomputer 770 for the payout control unit. Further, the serial communication circuits 750 and 752 operate in the FIFO mode. 64 bytes for transmission and 8 bytes for reception can be used as a FIFO.

For example, when the main control unit microcomputer 760 transmits data, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 refers to the status register of the serial communication circuit 750 built in the main control unit microcomputer 760 and is "transmittable". In this case, data is set in the transmission data register 766. The serial communication circuit 750 transmits the data set in the transmission data register 766.

For example, when the payout control unit microcomputer 770 receives data, the received data is written to the receive data register 774 of the serial communication circuit 752 built in the payout control unit microcomputer 770. The CPU of the payout control unit 600 refers to the status register and reads the received data from the received data register 774 when "reception completed" is reached.

For example, when the payout control unit microcomputer 770 transmits data, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 refers to the status register of the serial communication circuit 752 built in the payout control unit microcomputer 770 and is "transmittable". In this case, data is set in the transmission data register 776. The serial communication circuit 752 transmits the data set in the transmission data register 776.

For example, when the main control unit microcomputer 760 receives data, the received data is written to the reception data register 764 of the serial communication circuit 750 built in the main control unit microcomputer 760. The CPU of the main control unit 300 refers to the status register and reads the received data from the received data register 764 when "reception completed" is reached.

When transmitting data, the serial communication circuits 750 and 752 can detect the transmission state (data transmission completion, etc.) by referring to the status registers 762 and 772 of the serial communication circuits 750 and 752. Further, the serial communication circuits 750 and 752 refer to the status registers 762 and 772 when receiving data, and read the data from the received data registers 764 and 774 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, by referring to the status registers 762 and 772, whether or not there is noise-detected data in the received data, whether or not there is data including a break code, a framing error and a parity error, or whether or not overrun is detected. You can check the presence or absence.

In this way, for example, the command transmitted from the main control unit microcomputer 760 is written to the received data register 774 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770, and is used for various arithmetic processing and determination processing. After being stored in the CPU core register 712 of the computer 770, it is stored in the RAM (buffer) 708. Further, as will be described later, the command received by the payout control unit 600 is temporarily stored in the RAM (buffer) 708 before the command analysis process. By saving the received command in the buffer prior to the command analysis process in this way, the command is transmitted from the received data register 774 to the RAM 708 or from the received data register 774 to the CPU core register 712. Since the period during which the command is executed can be shortened, it is possible to reduce the situation in which commands are scattered in each register, and thus it may be possible to stabilize the game control.

The flow of serial communication processing of the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (c). First, the first communication confirmation command (main control communication confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 (1). The payout control unit 600 receives a main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 (2). When the payout control unit 600 receives the main control communication confirmation command, it transmits a second communication confirmation command (a response command to the first communication confirmation command, a payout control communication confirmation command) to the main control unit 300 (3). .. Upon receiving the payout control communication confirmation command, the main control unit 300 transmits a command (for example, a prize ball command here) to the payout control unit 600 (4).

The processes (1) to (3) are in the state of confirming communication, and in this state, the main control unit 300 does not send a command to the payout control unit 600. When the process (3) is completed, the communication confirmation is completed, and in this state, the main control unit 300 transmits a prize ball command to the payout control unit 600. For example, in consideration of the influence of noise and the like, the process (1) is performed a plurality of times, and when the command indicating the completion of the communication confirmation of the process (3) cannot be obtained a predetermined number of times, a communication error state is set. Even in this communication error state, the main control unit 300 does not send the prize ball command to the payout control unit 600. In addition, in order to notify an error, a signal is output to a device connected to the outside. It is not necessary to output the signal to the device connected to the outside.

The process (1) is executed, for example, once for every predetermined number of interrupt processes, for example, once out of 25 times (50 times, ..., Etc.) of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit. The process (2) and the process (3) may be executed by the same interrupt process or may be executed by different interrupt processes. Further, the control state of the payout control unit 600 may be transmitted by the same interrupt process as the process (3). The control state of the payout control unit 600 may be transmitted only when there is a change (for example, when the state changes from a normal state to an abnormal state (in the case of an error)).

Further, the payout control unit 600 can at least execute a process related to awarding when the first command (prize ball command) is stored in the first storage means (received data register 774 or the like). When the second command (main control communication confirmation command) is stored in the first storage means, the main control unit 300 receives a third command (payout control communication confirmation command (response command of main control communication confirmation command). ) Is at least feasible (more on this later).

The size of each of the receive data register 764 and the transmission data register 766 of the main control unit microcomputer 760 and the receive data register 774 and the transmission data register 776 of the payout control unit microcomputer 770 is limited, and the CPU core. When transmitting and receiving data to and from the registers 712 and 722 and the RAMs 308 and 708, data leakage may occur, for example, when a condition such as an abnormality occurs.

<Serial communication related registers>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, various registers included in the above-mentioned serial communication-related registers will be described in detail. Note that FIG. 8 is a block diagram of various registers included in the serial communication-related registers and a diagram showing the contents of the various registers.

As described with reference to FIG. 7, the microcomputer 760 for the main control unit has a status register 762, a reception data register 764, a transmission data register 766, and other registers 768 as serial communication-related registers. Among these registers, the other registers 768 include an authentication status register 768a, transmission data FIFA 768b, a game status information register 768c, a game machine frame information register 768d, a recovery completion notification register 768e, and the like, as shown in FIG. Is done.

The authentication status register 768a is information indicating that the authentication was completed normally (for example, a numerical value 1) or information indicating that the authentication was not completed normally (for example, when the authentication described later is completed). This is a register in which any of the numerical values 0) is set. Further, the transmission data FIFA 768b is a buffer for temporarily storing game information transmitted by the main control unit 300 to an external control unit such as the payout control unit 600.

In this example, the game information transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the transmission data FIFA 768b is composed of 1-byte length type information and 1-byte length count information, for a total of 2 bytes length information. The type information can be classified into a 4-bit length data type and a 4-bit length data number, and the data types are the start port (for example, the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, and the normal figure start). It is information indicating the type of game information such as a mouth 228), a winning mouth (for example, a general winning mouth 226), a large winning mouth (for example, a variable winning mouth 234), and the number of times a symbol is stopped. The data number is information representing a number for each data type. If the data type is a start opening, a winning opening, or a large winning opening, the count information stores the number of winning balls with a 4-bit length and the number of winnings with a 4-bit length, and if the data type is the number of symbol stops. The count information stores the number of times the symbol is stopped with a length of 4 bits.

Further, the game state information register 768c is a register for storing game state information (information regarding the number of prize balls, symbol stop, etc.) transmitted by the main control unit 300 to an external control unit such as the payout control unit 600. be. In this example, the game state information transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the game state information register 768c is composed of information having a length of 8 bytes. , Used for transmitting information on various abnormalities detected by the main control unit 300.

Further, the gaming machine frame information register 768d is a register for storing the gaming machine frame information (information regarding various abnormalities and various requests) received by the main control unit 300 from an external control unit such as the payout control unit 600. In this example, the game frame information received via the game machine frame information register 768d consists of information having a length of 8 bytes, for example, information on various abnormalities detected by an external control unit such as the payout control unit 600, and payout. It is used for receiving a request to the main control unit 300 (a game ball counting request, a power saving transition request, etc.) from an external control unit such as the control unit 600. Further, the recovery completion notification register 768e is a register in which information (for example, a numerical value 1) indicating that the recovery is completed is set when the recovery described later is completed.

<Power control>
FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the power supply control of the present embodiment. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing an operating state of each control unit when the power is cut off and supplied, and FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram showing an operating state of each control unit when the power is cut off. Is.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the power supply supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current and supplies it to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The payout control unit 600 supplies power to the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 supplies power to the second sub control unit 500. That is, when the power supply rises from the OFF state to the ON state, the first sub-control unit 400 rises from the reset state to the reset release state, and then the second sub-control unit 500 rises from the reset state to the reset release state. Similarly, when the power supply rises from the OFF state to the ON state, the payout control unit 600 rises from the reset state to the reset release state, and then the main control unit 300 rises from the reset state to the reset release state. The power supply may be AC100V.

As will be described later, during the period from when the payout control unit 600 rises to the reset release state until the main control unit 300 rises to the reset release state, the payout control unit 600 can receive a command and analyzes the received command. You can also do it. Further, the payout control unit 600 can set the number of prize balls, but the payout process is not executed. After that, when the payout control unit 600 receives the first main control communication confirmation command transmitted from the main control unit 300 after the main control unit 300 has started up in the reset release state, the set number of prize balls is set (unintended). It may be deleted (as a prize ball command sent at the timing). Further, when the prize ball command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 after the main control unit 300 has started up in the reset release state (and after the payout control unit 600 has started up in the reset release state). , Process as a normal command.

Here, based on the contents described above, the operation when the voltage supply to the game console is reduced will be described. For example, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like during a big hit, if the game console is returned to the initial state by turning on the power again, the player will be in a significantly disadvantageous state. In order to prevent such a situation, the power stored in the capacitor is used to execute a power failure process (described later) that maintains the state of the game console. This power cut processing is executed not only when the power is turned off (hereinafter referred to as power off) but also when the supply voltage temporarily drops due to factors such as static electricity (hereinafter referred to as momentary power cut). NS. FIG. 3B is a diagram showing the operation of the power failure processing.

When the power is turned off, the voltage is not supplied (power interruption occurs), but the voltage does not become 0 immediately, and the supply voltage gradually drops due to the power stored in the capacitor. For example, when the supply voltage of 12V drops to a predetermined voltage (9.66V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal is transmitted from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300. By receiving this signal, it is determined that the power failure has occurred in the main process (described later) of the main control unit 300, and the power failure processing is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 3B, the power supply monitoring state of the main control unit 300 is the power supply disconnection release state from the occurrence of the power failure until the supply voltage drops to 9.66V, and the supply voltage. After the voltage drops below 9.66V, the power is turned off. The power off state here means a state in which the voltage falls below a predetermined value and the low voltage signal described later is turned on, and does not mean a state in which the power supply is actually cut off. ..

Similarly, in the payout control unit 600, when the supply voltage of 12V drops to a predetermined voltage (8.3V in this embodiment), it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and the power failure processing is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 6B, the power supply monitoring state of the payout control unit 600 is the power supply disconnection release state from the occurrence of the power failure until the supply voltage drops to 8.3 V, and the supply voltage. After the voltage drops below 8.3V, the power is turned off.

Further, each of the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is provided with a start signal output circuit (described later) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. For example, in the main control unit 300, when the CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 receives the input of the start signal, the reset starts by reset interruption (in the reset release state), and the main control unit main processing is performed according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306. To execute. The same applies to the payout control unit 600. Then, when the supply voltage of 12V falls below a predetermined voltage, the reset state is set and the device waits until the power off state is released.

<Setting process when power is turned on>
Next, the power-on setting process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of the power-on setting process.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input starts resetting by reset interruption, and executes the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 10 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

In step S101, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9.66 V in this embodiment). It monitors whether or not the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped in a certain case. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (for example, when the predetermined value (9.66V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on), the process of step S101 is repeatedly executed, and the low voltage signal is turned off. (For example, when the predetermined value (9.66V) is reached after the power is turned on), the process proceeds to step S102.

In step S102, the initial setting is performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT314 is set. Allow operation and set initial values. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value, and the mask information provided in the RAM 308 is set to an initial value (for example, 11111111B (FFH (H is a hexadecimal number)). Shown. The same applies below))) is set. Further, 25 (a numerical value corresponding to a time of about 100 ms) is set as the initial value of the communication confirmation command described later.

In step S103, the checksum is calculated. The method for calculating this checksum is not particularly limited, but in this example, the initial value of 1-byte length data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is 0. The checksum is calculated by adding all the registers of a certain 1-byte structure.

In step S104, a RAM error confirmation process is performed. Details will be described later, but in this RAM error confirmation process, a process of determining whether or not the checksum result calculated in step S103 and the set value set by the clerk of the amusement store is normal is performed. .. In step S105, the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on. In this RAM clear at the time of power-on, among all the storage areas of the RAM 308, the data stored in the storage area that needs to be initialized at the time of power-on is initialized.

In step S106, the power-on mode confirmation process is performed. Details will be described later, but in this power-on mode confirmation process, a process of setting start information according to the start state of the pachinko machine 100 and the like is performed. In step S107, the start information set in the RAM error confirmation process in step 104, the power-on mode confirmation process in step S106, or the like (in this example, setting change, initial start, power recovery start, or RAM error) is referred to. It is determined whether or not the activation method this time is a setting change or an initial activation, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S108, and if not, the process proceeds to step S111.

Here, the "initial start" is a state in which the power is turned on and the pachinko machine 100 is started in a state where the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON and the setting key (not shown) is OFF. Further, the "setting change" is a state in which the power is turned on and the pachinko machine 100 is started in a state where the RAM clear switch 180 is ON and the setting key is ON. Further, the "return start" is a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is started in a state where the RAM clear switch 180 is OFF and the setting key is OFF (due to the restoration of power after the power is cut off).

In step S108, the initial setting of the soft random number is performed, in the next step S109, the RAM clear range at the time of initial startup (the storage area that needs to be initialized at the time of initial startup) is set, and in the next step S110, the RAM clear process is performed. I do. In this RAM clearing process, the data stored in the storage area that needs to be initialized at the time of initial startup or the setting change is initialized among all the storage areas of the RAM 308 according to the range set in step S109.

In step S111, the RAM initial setting at the time of power recovery activation is performed. In this RAM initial setting at the time of power recovery, the data stored in the storage area that needs to be initialized at the time of power recovery is initialized out of all the storage areas of the RAM 308.

In step S112, an initial value (1000, which is a numerical value corresponding to 4000 ms in this example) is set in the interrupt function limited counter stored in the RAM 308, and in the next step S113, the output port CS of the I / O 310 is initialized. In step S114, port output processing is performed when the power is turned on. In this power-on port output process, when the power is turned on after performing a process of outputting a clear signal from a predetermined output port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port or an output port to the first sub-control unit 400). The setting process is completed, and the process proceeds to the main control unit main process described with reference to FIG.

<RAM error confirmation processing>
Next, the RAM error confirmation process (step S104) in the above-mentioned power-on setting process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the flow of the RAM error confirmation process.

In step S121, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated by the power-on setting process described with reference to FIG. 10 is normal. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S122, and if the checksum is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S122. Proceeds to step S124. In step S122, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the RAM 308 is larger than the maximum set value (in this example, the numerical value 6 indicating that the setting is 6), and when the set value is equal to or less than the maximum set value. If (when the set value is normal), the process proceeds to step S123, and when the set value is larger than the maximum set value (when the set value is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S124.

In step S123, it is determined whether or not the power supply status is suspended (whether or not the power supply is detected), and if applicable (when the power supply is detected), a RAM error confirmation process is performed. If it is not applicable (in the case where the power failure is not detected), the process proceeds to step S124. In step S124, the set value is initialized to the initial value (in this example, the numerical value 1 indicating that the setting is 1), and in the next step S125, the RAM error confirmation process is completed after setting the RAM error as the start information. do.

<Power-on mode confirmation process>
Next, the power-on mode confirmation process (step S106) in the above-mentioned power-on setting process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the flow of the power-on mode confirmation process.

In step S131, the value of the input port CS2 (the state of the RAM clear switch 180 and the setting key) is acquired, and Key input information is generated based on the acquired value. Specifically, in this example, when the RAM clear switch 180 is ON and the setting key is OFF, 00H (RAM clear) is set in the Key input information, the RAM clear switch 180 is OFF, and the setting key is OFF. In that case, 01H (no input) is set in the key input information, and when the RAM clear switch 180 is ON and the setting key is ON, 02H (RAM clear & setting key) is set in the key input information, and the RAM is set. When the clear switch 180 is OFF and the setting key is ON, 03H (setting key) is set in the key input information.

In step S132, the offset value of the address of the RAM 308 is acquired according to the Key input information generated in step S131, and in the next step S133, a predetermined address is referred to based on the offset value acquired in step S132 and the operation is started. Get the state. In step S134, the startup status data is acquired according to the activation status acquired in step S133, and in the next step S135, activation information (setting change, initial activation in this example) is acquired based on the activation status data acquired in step S134. , Power recovery start, RAM error, etc.), and then end the power-on mode confirmation process.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 starts the main control unit main process after completing the power-on setting process described with reference to FIG. 10. In step S141, after the interrupt prohibition is set, in the next step S142, the WDT 314 is cleared and restarted to start the time measurement by the WDT 314.

In step S143, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, there are two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter, the normal figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer. Update the two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S146, which will be described later. In step S143, in addition to the basic random number initial value update process, the basic random number update process described later may be performed, or only the basic random number update process may be performed.

In step S144, interrupt permission is set, and in the next step S145, command transmission processing is performed. In this command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the like.

The details will be described later, but the output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, and the bits 15 are strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is set). Bits 11 to 14 are configured by command type. The main control unit 300 prepares to transmit a command to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 by performing a process of turning on and off strobe information in step S144, and a step of a main control unit timer interrupt process described later. In S233, the command is configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S146, other determination random value update processing is performed. In step S147, a communication abnormality processing is performed. Details will be described later, but in this communication abnormality processing, a recovery processing is performed when an abnormality occurs in communication with the payout control unit 600.

In step S148, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned low voltage signal is on, and if the low voltage signal is on (when a power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S149, and if the low voltage signal is off. If (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S141. After that, the main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S141 to S148 except during the main control unit timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

In step S149, interrupt prohibition is set, and in the next step S150, the power supply status stored in the RAM 408 is set to suspend. Further, in step S151, the total value of the RAM 308 at the time of power failure (when the power is cut off) is calculated and stored (stored) in the RMA 308, and then in the next step S152, after setting the access prohibition to the RAM 308 to be infinite. It becomes a loop.

<Processing when communication is abnormal>
Next, the communication abnormality processing (step S147) in the above-mentioned main control unit main processing will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the flow of communication abnormality processing in the main control unit main processing.

In step S155, it is determined whether the communication abnormality flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S156, and if it is off, the process ends. The communication abnormality flag is set to on (for example, a numerical value of 1) when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the communication abnormality monitoring process described later (details will be described later).

In steps S156 and S157, it is determined whether or not the authentication is completed by referring to the authentication status register 768a (see FIG. 8), and the recovery is completed by referring to the recovery completion notification register 768e (see FIG. 8). If it is determined whether or not the authentication has been performed, the authentication is completed, and the recovery is completed, the process proceeds to step S158. If the recovery is not completed when the authentication is completed, the authentication may be performed again. In step S158, after setting the communication abnormality flag stored in the RAM 308 to off (for example, a numerical value of 0), the process ends.

The authentication method executed in step S156 is not particularly limited, and for example, the initial value of 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is 0. The checksum is calculated by adding all to the 1-byte register, and it depends on whether the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal or not). Another method is to authenticate.

Further, the "recovery" executed in step S157 means that when a communication abnormality such as a power failure or a communication line disconnection occurs and there is untransmitted data from the main control unit 300, the encrypted communication control unit 315 (FIG. 8). (See) refers to a process of automatically transmitting untransmitted data to another control unit such as the payout control unit 600 (regardless of the control program of the main control unit 300).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the main control unit timer interrupt. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203, the WDT is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 4 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full tank sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I / O 310. It is input to monitor the presence or absence of a detection signal, and is stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 4 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is judged that there was a passage of. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226 and 234 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next to determine whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set.

For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the general figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In step S212, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limitation counter is 0, and if the interrupt function limitation counter is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S213. On the other hand, when the interrupt function limitation counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S214. In step S213, after performing the sub-start wait wait process (details will be described later), the process proceeds to step S239 without performing the processes of steps S215 to S235.

In step S214, it is determined whether or not the specific abnormality detection flag (details will be described later) is ON (for example, a numerical value 1) and whether or not the communication abnormality flag is ON (for example, a numerical value 1). If any of the flags is ON, the process proceeds to step S239 without performing the processes of steps S215 to S235. On the other hand, when both flags are OFF (for example, the numerical value is 0), the process proceeds to step S215.

In step S215, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for counting, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing / stopping the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time , Update various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S216, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228, the winning ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In this prize acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize in the general prize opening 226, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the normal drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning opening 234, and winning a prize. If there is, the corresponding number of prize balls is stored in the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening and starting opening. In step S219, serial command management processing is performed. Details will be described later, but in this serial command management process, serial communication with the payout control unit 600 is managed.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (a variable game of the normal map).

Further, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display the out-of-line symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs definite display of either the hit symbol (normal symbol A) or the missed symbol (general symbol B). After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. do. Further, if the result of the normal-figure variable game is out of order, the non-normal-figure flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this out-of-normal flag is on, even in the normal-figure state update process at the end of the predetermined stop display period described above (the timing when the value of the normal-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random value is then acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

In step S224, the special figure look-ahead control process is performed. In this special figure look-ahead control process, look-ahead of the special figure winning random number value and the like is performed. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a general drawing Probability fluctuation flags Each flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation. When the flag is on, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, 2R jackpot When the flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on. The special figure D and 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E and 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the normal When the figure probability fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first missed flag are on. In the case of, the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is performed so that the special figure I and the special figure I are in the respective modes when the second off flag is on. , The setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability change symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time saving symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation symbol (special symbol E), sudden normal symbol (special symbol F), first small hit symbol (special symbol G), second small hit symbol (special symbol H), first missed symbol (special symbol) Confirmation display of any one of I) and the second outlier symbol (special symbol J) is performed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, the player waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, the door member 234a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are won in the variable winning opening 234. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the closing period is stored in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process which repeats the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the effect waiting period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving number of times 100 times is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot is shortened. When this time saving flag is set to on, it is in a high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, there is a higher possibility of hitting the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special-figure variable game are shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state. Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because, if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of games are played in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, and many games are played in the second special drawing starting port 232 until the game ball enters. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases due to the ball entering the ball and the gambling property increases. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is different, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure start port 232. However, the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special figure start port 230 is notified with priority.

In step S232, the device monitoring process is executed. Details will be described later, but in this device monitoring process, processing for detecting the presence or absence of errors in various devices is performed. Here, the errors monitored by this device monitoring process include a lower tray full tank error (lower plate full tank error), a payout device error, a payout excess error, an illegal payout error, a payout quantity switch error, a main control communication error, and a CR unit not yet. Examples include connection error, CR unit communication error, magnetic abnormality error, external clock abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, switch level abnormality error, frame opening error (front frame door opening error), switch non-connection error, impact sensor error, and the like.

The lower plate full tank error is when the on state of the lower plate full tank switch signal is read once by a timer interrupt from a predetermined input port on the main board (when switching from the off state to the on state) from the main. It is output to the payout. A payout device error is a payout request in which the number of payouts (count number of payout number switches) is within the next interrupt after the payout motor finishes driving for the number of payout requests (actually, after the + braking period + non-excitation period elapses). The occurrence of a payout device error is detected when the number is less than the number. The error state is cleared when the retry process of paying out the game balls one by one is completed.

The payout excess error is to stop the payout operation when 10 more game balls actually paid out are detected with respect to the number of payout requests. This payout excess error is an error released by the error release switch 168, and the error state is released by operating the error release switch 168 or initializing by the RAM clear switch 180 (RAM clear). The illegal payout error is to stop the payout operation when the payout of the game ball is detected (the payout number switch counts) when the payout request is not generated. This illegal payout error is an error released by the error release switch 168, and the error state is released by operating the error release switch 168 or initializing by the RAM clear switch 180 (RAM clear).

The payout number switch error is an error of the payout number switch (not shown) of the game ball controlled by the payout board 170, and when a connection abnormality of the payout number switch is detected (regardless of the main board), the payout operation is stopped. It is something to do. This payout quantity switch error is an error released by the error release switch 168, and after confirming whether the switch connection is correct, the error release switch 168 is operated or the RAM clear switch 180 is initialized (RAM clear). The error status is cleared. The main control communication error is an error that occurs when the off state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected or when the on state of the main control operation confirmation signal is continuously detected for two interrupts, and is a command from the main board. It becomes impossible to receive. However, if the number of withdrawal requests remains, the amount will be paid out up to that amount. The error state is canceled when the on state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected and when the off state of the main control operation confirmation signal is continuously detected for two interrupts.

The CR unit non-connection error occurs when the CR unit connection signal (VL signal) is detected to be off when the CR unit non-connection error is in the release state and continues for 16 ms, and the loan is suspended (award). There is no effect on the payout of balls). The ON state of the CR unit connection signal is detected, and the error state is canceled when the ON state is continued for 16 ms. After the error is cleared, the communication with the CR unit is disabled until the CR unit READY signal (BRDY signal) and the CR unit lending request completion confirmation signal (BRQ signal) are turned off.

Here, the connection signal relationship between the CR unit and the interface will be described. When various signals are transmitted from the CR unit to the payout board via the interface, the CR unit connection signal is a VL signal consisting of a + 18V power supply in the CR unit. The CR unit READY signal is a BRDY signal that conveys that the CR unit is in the process of being rented out. The CR unit lending request confirmation signal is a BRQ signal in which the CR unit transmits 25 lending requests and lending instructions for the basic unit.

The CR unit communication error occurs when the ON state of the BRQ signal is detected before the lending request is generated (note that there are other conditions, but they are omitted here because they are not particularly relevant). After notifying the communication abnormality from the gaming machine side, the error state is canceled by turning off the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal.

The magnetic anomaly error stops the main control operation when a magnetic force exceeding a predetermined amount is detected. The external clock abnormality error is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected in the random number update clock. The magnetic field abnormality error is an error that occurs when a magnetic field exceeding a predetermined amount is detected. The switch level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a winning switch is detected and continues for 1 s. The frame opening error is an error that occurs when the opening of the glass frame or the inner frame is detected. The switch non-connection error is an error of the winning switch (not shown), and is an error that occurs when a connection abnormality of the winning switch is detected. The impact sensor error is to continuously notify the error until the power is turned off when the impact sensor detects an impact exceeding a predetermined amount.

In step S233, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands (for example, if there is a specific abnormality in the device monitoring process of step S232, a signal indicating the specific abnormality) are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, a basic command, a symbol fluctuation start command, a symbol fluctuation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot round number specification command, a power recovery command, a RAM (registered trademark) clear command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off by the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the special figure The value of the probability fluctuation flag is included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the first special figure start port 230 has been won, whether or not the second special figure start port 232 has been won, and whether or not the variable winning opening 234 has been won. Including presence / absence.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related, which are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned prize-winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the prize-winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300 depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, a process of outputting external terminal board signals 3 to 10 toward the payout board 170 is performed. As described above, the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 may be configured to be output to the external terminal board 609 without passing through the payout board 170. Further, here, a security signal is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336.

In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and then the process returns to the main control unit main process. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit described above.

<Waiting for sub-start wait processing>
Next, the sub-start wait wait process (step S213) in the above-mentioned main control timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the flow of the sub-start wait wait process.

In step S2001, 1 is subtracted from the interrupt function limitation counter, and in the next step S2002, it is determined whether or not the value of the interrupt function limitation counter is 0. Then, when the value of the interrupt function limited counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S2003, and when the value of the interrupt function limited counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2004. In step S2003, the RAM initial setting at the time of turning on the power is performed. In the RAM initial setting at the time of power-on, the data stored in the storage area that requires the initial setting at the time of power-on is initially set among all the storage areas of the RAM 308.

In step S2004, it is determined whether or not the value of the interrupt function limitation counter subtracted in step S2001 matches the value of the power-on command transmission time (125, which is a numerical value corresponding to 500 ms in this example), and if they match. To step S2005, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2005, after setting the transmission request of the power-on command, the sub-start wait wait process is terminated after the power-on command is transmitted in the next step S2006. Here, the power-on command is a command including setting information related to the setting value (information of the setting value confirmed in the setting management process, etc.), and the name of the command is not particularly limited.

In step S2007, it is determined whether or not the value of the interrupt function limited counter subtracted in step S2001 matches the value of the start command transmission time (250, which is a numerical value corresponding to 1000 ms in this example), and if they match. Goes to step S2008, and if they do not match, goes to step S2011. In step S2008, after setting the start command transmission request, the sub-start wait wait process is terminated after the start command is transmitted in the next step S2009. Here, the start command is a command related to start start of the first sub-control unit 400, and the name of the command is not particularly limited.

In step S2011, it is determined whether or not the start command has been transmitted, and if applicable, the sub-start wait wait process is terminated, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, the process proceeds to step S2013 after performing the setting management process. Details will be described later, but in this setting management process, processing such as setting of setting values is performed. In step S2013, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limited counter addition flag is ON or OFF. If it is ON, the process proceeds to step S2014, and if it is OFF, the sub-start wait wait process is terminated. In step S2014, the sub-start wait wait process is terminated after adding 1 to the interrupt function limited counter.

In the sub-start wait wait process according to this example, 1 is subtracted from the interrupt function limited counter in step S2001, but when it is determined in step S2013 that the interrupt function limited counter addition flag is ON, the interrupt is interrupted in step S2014. Since 1 is added to the function-limited counter, the value of the interrupt function-limited counter is held before and after the sub-start wait wait processing.

<Setting management process>
Next, the setting management process (step S2012) in the above-mentioned sub-start wait wait process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting management process.

In step S2101, the start information stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step 2102, it is determined whether or not the start information is a return start or an initial start, and if applicable, the setting management process is terminated. If not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, a security signal (in this example, a recovery start or a start other than the initial start (RAM error, setting) is directed to the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. A signal indicating that the start is a change or a setting confirmation) is output, and in the next step S2104, it is determined whether or not the start information is a RAM error, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2105, and the corresponding step S2105 is performed. If not, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2105, the setting management process ends after making the settings for displaying the error.

In step S2106, it is determined whether or not the activation information is a setting change, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2107, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2110. In step S2107, the interrupt function limited counter addition flag stored in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S2107. In step S2108, an input of a setting switch (not shown) is detected, and in the next step S2109, a process of changing the setting value stored in the RAM 308 each time the setting switch is pressed (for example, setting 1 → setting 2 → setting 3). → Setting 4 → Setting 5 → Setting 6 → Setting 1 → ...).

In step S2110, the input of the setting key is detected, and in the next step S2111, it is determined whether the setting key is on or off. In the case, the process proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, the interrupt function limited counter addition flag is set to OFF, and in the next step S2113, the setting management process is terminated after the start information is cleared (initialized), so that the set value due to the setting change is confirmed.

<Various processes from power-on to start of normal game>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19, various processes executed from the time the power is turned on until the start of the normal game will be described in detail. Note that FIG. 18 is a time chart showing the flow of various processes executed from the time the power is turned on to the start of the normal game in the initial start-up or the return start-up, and FIG. 19 is a time chart for setting change or setting confirmation. It is a time chart which shows the flow of various processing executed from the power-on to the start of a normal game.

The various processes that can be executed in the pachinko machine 100 from the time the power is turned on until the normal game is started can be roughly classified into five types of processes, the first process S1 to the sixth process S6. The first process S1 is a process related to the activation of the first sub-control unit 400. The second process S2 is a process started after the first process S1 and sends a command (in this example, a start command) related to the start start of the first sub-control unit 400 to the first sub-control unit 400. It is a process of sending to.

The third process S3 is a process started after the second process S2 when the power is turned on in a state where the set value can be changed (in this example, the setting key is ON). , Processing related to settings (in this example, setting change or setting confirmation). The fourth process S4 is a process started after the third process S3, and is a process composed of a plurality of types of processes including a lottery process.

The fifth process S5 uses a random number value used in the lottery process in the fourth process S4 (in this example, a lottery process such as a general drawing-related lottery process, a special figure 1-related lottery process, and a special figure 2 related lottery process). It is a process to be updated and is a process started before the third process S3. The sixth process S6 is a command (in this example, a power supply) including setting information related to the set value (information of the set value determined in the setting management process, etc.) in a certain period after the third process S3 is completed. This is a process of transmitting an input command) to the first sub-control unit 400.

The interrupt function limited counter is a counter for controlling the start timing and end timing of the first processing S1 to the sixth processing S6, and is executed from the power-on until the normal game is started. One of the features of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is that the execution timing of the processing is controlled by one counter.

According to the pachinko machine 100 according to this example, since the start timing and end timing of a plurality of types of processing can be controlled by one counter, the control load can be reduced and the storage capacity for the counter can be reduced. Can be reduced and the limited storage capacity can be effectively utilized.

As described with reference to FIG. 9, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 100, the power supply control unit 660 converts the power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, and the payout control unit 600 and the first It is supplied to the sub control unit 400. The payout control unit 600 supplies power to the main control unit 300, the payout control unit 600 rises from the reset state to the reset release state, and then the main control unit 300 rises from the reset state to the reset release state. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 supplies power to the second sub-control unit 500, the first sub-control unit 400 rises from the reset state to the reset release state, and then the second sub-control unit 500 resets from the reset state. Stand up in the unlocked state.

<First process S1>
The timing indicated by reference numeral T1 in the figure indicates that the main control unit 300 rises from the reset state to the reset release state when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 100, and the first process S1 (related to the activation of the first sub control unit 400) Processing) has started.

The main control unit 300 starts the first process S1 by starting the power-on setting process described with reference to FIG. 10, and the interrupt function limited counter stored in the RAM 308 in step S112 of the power-on setting process. Is set to an initial value (in this example, 1000, which is a numerical value corresponding to 4000 ms). Further, in the first process S1, after the main control unit main process described with reference to FIG. 13 is started following the power-on setting process, the basic random number initial value is updated in step S143 of the main control unit main process. By performing the processing and setting the interrupt permission in the subsequent step S144, the main control unit timer interrupt processing described with reference to FIG. 15 is started.

In steps S207 to S211 of the main control unit timer interrupt process, basic random number initial value update process, basic random number update process, effect random number update process, and the like are performed. Here, the basic random number initial value update process of the main control unit main process, the basic random number initial value update process of the main control unit timer interrupt process, and the basic random number update process are performed in the fifth process S5 (lottery in the fourth process S4). It is a process of updating the random number value used for the process (in this example, the lottery process related to the normal figure, the lottery process related to the special figure 1, the lottery process related to the special figure 2, etc.) and before the third process S3. Corresponds to the process started in).

Subsequently, in step S213 of the main control unit timer interrupt process, the sub-start wait wait process described with reference to FIG. 16 is executed. In this sub-start wait wait process, 1 is subtracted from the interrupt function limited counter every time (in this example, once every 4 ms), and the value of the interrupt function limited counter after the subtraction is the value of the start command transmission time (first). In this example, it is determined whether or not the value matches 250), which is a numerical value corresponding to 1000 ms. If the value does not match, the sub-start wait wait process is terminated because it is before the start command is transmitted. Main control unit Main processing and main control unit timer interrupt processing are continued. However, since the interrupt function limitation counter is not 0 (because the interrupt function is being limited), the processing of steps S215 to S235 is not executed in the main control unit timer interrupt processing, and the normal game is not started. ..

On the other hand, when the value of the interrupt function limited counter after subtraction matches the value of the start command transmission time, the first process S1 is terminated and the second process S2 (start of the first sub-control unit 400 is started). (In this example, a start command) is started (a process of transmitting to the first sub-control unit 400).

Therefore, the execution period of the first process S1 according to this example is the second from the timing indicated by the reference numeral T1 (the timing when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on and the main control unit 300 starts the power-on setting process). It is the period until just before the start of the processing of.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 rises from the reset state to the reset release state due to the power supply, starts the sub-control unit main processing described later, and starts, but receives a command from the main control unit 300. Unless the command is executed, various processes corresponding to the command are not executed. Therefore, the main control unit 300 sends the start command to the first sub-control unit 400 after the main control unit 300 starts. Waits for command reception (standby state).

<Second process S2>
At the timing indicated by reference numeral T2 in the figure, the first process is completed, and the next second process S2 (command related to start start of the first sub control unit 400 (in this example, start command) is executed by the first sub control unit. This is the state in which the process of transmitting to 400) has been started.

When the main control unit 300 determines in the sub-start wait wait process that the value of the interrupt function limitation counter after subtraction matches the value of the start command transmission time, the main control unit 300 directs the start command to the first sub-control unit 400. The second process S2 is started by transmitting.

Further, since the start command is transmitted after the end of the second process S2, the setting management process described with reference to FIG. 17 is started in step S2012 of the sub-start wait wait process. In this setting management process, when the start information is return start or initial start, the setting management process is terminated. Therefore, in the initial start or return start shown in FIG. 18, the third process S3 is not performed. When a certain period of time has passed (in this example, when the interrupt function limitation counter becomes 0), the fourth process S4 (a process composed of a plurality of types of processes including a lottery process), which will be described later, is started. do. On the other hand, when the start information is a setting change, the third process S3 (process related to the setting) is started in the setting confirmation process. Therefore, in the setting change or setting confirmation shown in FIG. 19, the third process S3 To start.

Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 receives the start command from the main control unit 300, the setting-changing notification (or the setting-changing notification) that notifies that the setting is being changed (or the setting is being confirmed) in the effect control process described later. For example, processing such as reading the effect data for displaying by the decorative symbol display device 208 and outputting the sound from the speaker 120) from the ROM 406 is performed.

By this processing, for example, the setting changing notification (for example, an image including the character string "setting is being changed") is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the setting changing notification is displayed from the speaker 120. (For example, the voice "Settings are being changed") is output. The means for notifying during the setting change is not limited to the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120, and may be an LED, a movable body, or the like.

<Third process S3>
After completing the transmission of the start command, the main control unit 300 executes the process after step S2107 in the setting management process when the start information is the setting change, so that the third process is as shown in FIG. Start S3 (processing related to setting).

In the third process S3, the process of changing the set value each time the setting switch is pressed, the input of the setting key is detected, the setting change is continued when it is on, and the setting value is changed by the setting change when it is off. Performs processing and the like to confirm. Further, during the execution of the third process S3, the interrupt function limited counter addition flag is set to ON in step S2107 of the setting management process, and the interrupt function limited counter after subtraction is set to 1 in step S2014 of the sub-start wait wait process. Is configured so that the value of the interrupt function limited counter does not decrease.

With such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the count value of the counter has reached the second specific value, and if applicable, the count value of the counter is subtracted (or added) to count the counter. Compared to the case where the process of updating the value to a value other than the second specific value is adopted, the program may be simplified and the program capacity may be reduced, and the limited storage capacity can be effectively utilized. ..

On the other hand, when the setting key is off, the process of confirming the set value is performed to end the third process, and when a certain period of time elapses (in this example, the interrupt function limitation counter becomes 0). (When this happens), the fourth process (a process composed of a plurality of types of processes including a lottery process), which will be described later, is started.

Therefore, the execution period of the third process S3 according to this example is the period from the end of the transmission of the start command to the end of the setting value and the setting change process.

<Fourth process S4, sixth process S6>
In the initial start-up or return start-up shown in FIG. 18, the main control unit 300 does not perform the third process S3, and when a certain period of time elapses (in this example, the interrupt function limitation counter becomes 0). In some cases), the fourth process S4 (process composed of a plurality of types of processes including the lottery process) is started, and in the setting change or setting confirmation shown in FIG. 19, the third process S3 is terminated or When the period elapses (in this example, when the interrupt function limitation counter becomes 0), the fourth process S4 (process composed of a plurality of types of processes including the lottery process) is started.

In a certain period after the end of the third process S3, the basic random number initial value update process is performed in step S143 of the main control unit main process, and the basic random number is performed in steps S207 to S211 of the main control unit timer interrupt process. Performs initial value update processing, basic random number update processing, effect random number update processing, and the like.

Further, in step S213 of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, the sub-start wait wait process is executed. In this sub-start wait wait process, 1 is subtracted from the interrupt function limited counter every time (in this example, once every 4 ms), and the value of the interrupt function limited counter after the subtraction is the value of the power-on command transmission time (No. 1). Three specific values. In this example, it is determined whether or not they match 125), which is a numerical value corresponding to 500 ms. If they do not match, the sub-start wait wait process is terminated, and the main control unit main process and main control Subtimer interrupt processing is continued. However, since the interrupt function limitation counter is not 0 (because the interrupt function is being limited), the processing of steps S215 to S235 is not executed in the main control unit timer interrupt processing, and the normal game is not started. ..

On the other hand, in the sub-start wait wait processing, when it is determined that the value of the interrupt function limited counter after subtraction matches the value of the power-on command transmission time, the power-on command including the set value information is executed as the first sub. By transmitting to the control unit 400, the sixth process S6 (a process of transmitting a certain command (in this example, a power-on command) including setting information related to the set value to the first sub-control unit 400). To start. The timing indicated by reference numeral T3 in the figure is a state in which the sixth process S6 is started.

Since the first sub-control unit 400 receives the power-on command from the main control unit 300, in the effect control process described later, the first sub-control unit 400 erases the notification during the setting change and notifies the power-on notification that the power has been turned on. Processing such as reading the effect data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from the ROM 406 is performed.

By this processing, for example, a power-on notification (for example, an image including the character strings "RAM cleared" and "power-on") is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the speaker 120 Outputs a setting change notification (for example, a voice saying "RAM has been cleared" or "power has been turned on"). The means for notifying the power-on is not limited to the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120, and may be an LED, a movable body, or the like.

After the end of the sixth process S6, in the sub-start wait wait process, 1 is subtracted from the interrupt function limited counter every time (in this example, once every 4 ms), and the value of the interrupt function limited counter after the subtraction is 0. In the case of, the RAM initial setting at the time of turning on the power is performed, and the interrupt function limitation counter becomes 0 (because the interrupt function limitation is canceled). Therefore, in the main control unit timer interrupt processing, step S215 A fourth process S4 including the processes of S235 (for example, a lottery process related to a normal figure, a lottery process related to a special figure 1, a lottery process related to a special figure 2 and the like) is started (normal game is started). ..

<Serial command management process>
Next, the serial command management process (step S219) in the above-mentioned main control timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (a). Note that FIG. 20A is a flowchart showing the flow of the serial command management process.

As described above, this serial command management process is performed when it is determined in the main control unit timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 15 that the interrupt function limitation counter is other than 0 (when the timer interrupt function is limited). ), Or when it is determined that the specific abnormality detection flag is ON (when there is specific abnormality information such as a magnetic abnormality error or magnetic field abnormality error), or when it is determined that the communication abnormality flag is ON. Is a process that is not executed. If the timer interrupt function is only limited, the serial command management process may be configured to be executed. If there is only specific abnormality information, the serial command management process may be executed. May be configured to be executed, or may be configured to execute the serial command management process when it is only determined that the communication error flag is ON.

In step S255 of the serial command management process, the serial command reception process is performed. Details will be described later, but in this serial command reception process, it is determined whether or not a command has been received from the payout control unit 600, and if a command is received, a process corresponding to the command is performed. In step S256, the serial command transmission process is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this serial command transmission process, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600 is performed.

<Serial command reception processing>
Next, the serial command reception process (step S255) in the above-mentioned serial command management process will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (b). Note that FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command reception processing.

In step S261, it is determined whether or not a communication confirmation command has been received from the payout control unit 600, and if the command is received, various information is initialized by executing the processes of steps S262 to S264, and the command is received. If is not received, the process proceeds to step S265. In step S265, the process ends after performing other serial command reception processing.

In step S262, an initial value (0 in this example) is set in the serial command status stored in the RAM 308, and in the next step S263, an initial value (in this example) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission counter stored in the RAM 308. Then, set 10). Here, the serial command status is information indicating whether or not the prize ball command can be transmitted, and when the information is a numerical value 0, it indicates a state in which the prize ball command can be transmitted. When the information is a numerical value 1, it indicates that the prize ball command cannot be transmitted.

Further, the communication confirmation command transmission counter is a counter that is deducted by one each time the communication confirmation command is transmitted in step S277 of the serial command transmission process described later, and the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 is normally executed. It is used to determine whether or not the command has been received. When 10 is set as the initial value of the communication confirmation command transmission command, the main control unit 300 determines that the communication confirmation command transmission counter is 0 in step S278 of the serial command transmission process described later by the main control unit 300. This is when the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 could not be received even once during the period of transmitting 10 times.

In step S264, the serial command communication error flag stored in the RAM 308 is set to 0, and in the next step S265, other serial command reception processing is performed, and then the processing ends. Here, the serial command communication error flag is information indicating whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the serial communication, and when the information is a numerical value of 0, it indicates that the serial communication is normal. When the information is a numerical value 1, it indicates that an abnormality has occurred in serial communication.

<Serial command transmission process>
Next, the serial command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart showing the flow of serial command transmission processing, and FIG. 3B is an example of a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600.

In step S271, 1 is subtracted from the communication confirmation command transmission timer, and in the next step S272, whether or not the communication confirmation command transmission timer is 0 (a predetermined time after the communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600). (In this embodiment, whether or not 100 ms) has elapsed) is determined, and if it is 0 (when a predetermined time has elapsed), the processing of step S274 and subsequent steps is performed, and when it is other than 0 (a predetermined time has elapsed). If this is the case), the process proceeds to step S273. In step S273, the prize ball command setting process is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this prize ball command setting process, processing such as preparation for transmission of the prize ball command is executed when the transmission condition of the prize ball command is satisfied.

In step S274, an initial value (25 in this example) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission timer, and in the next step S275, 1 (a state in which the prize ball command cannot be transmitted) is set in the above-mentioned serial command status. The communication confirmation command transmission timer is a counter that is decremented by one every cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt process (about 4 ms in this embodiment) in step S271, and transmits a communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600. It is used to determine whether a predetermined time has passed since then. When 25 is set as the initial value of the communication confirmation command transmission timer, it is determined that the communication confirmation command transmission timer is 0 in step S272 after about 100 ms (= 4 ms × 25) has elapsed.

In this embodiment, by setting the serial command status to 1 in step S275, the prize ball command cannot be transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 at the timing of transmitting the communication confirmation command. However, it may be configured so that the prize ball command can be transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 at the same timing.

In step S276, the communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612 by setting the numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command (described later) in the transmission data register. In step S277, 1 is subtracted from the communication confirmation command transmission counter, and in the next step S278, it is determined whether or not the communication confirmation command transmission counter is 0 (whether or not the communication confirmation command is transmitted 10 times), and the value is 0. In the case (when the transmission is performed 10 times), the processing after step S279 is performed, and when the case is other than 0 (when the transmission is not performed 10 times), the process proceeds to step S281.

In step S279, the initial value (10 in this example) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission counter, and in the next step S281, the initial value (0 in this example) is set in the serial command status, and the next step S282. Then, after setting the initial value (1 in this example) in the serial command communication error flag, the process proceeds to step S283. In step S283, the process ends after performing other serial command transmission processing.

As shown in FIG. 3B, the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 include a main control communication confirmation command (value is 10H) at the time of initial startup and a main control communication confirmation at the time of return startup. Command (value is 11H), prize ball command instructing the payout of 3 game balls (value is 23H), prize ball command instructing the payout of 10 game balls (value is 2AH), 15 balls There is a prize ball command (value is 2FH) that instructs the payout of the game ball.

If the first command received from the main control unit 300 is the main control communication confirmation command (value is 11H) at the time of return startup, the return processing is performed and the main control communication confirmation command (value is 10H) at the time of initial startup is performed. ), RAM clear processing or the like is performed. As described above, when the main control unit 300 transmits the communication confirmation command, the power-on information is always added, and the value (10H) indicating the communication confirmation command and the value indicating the power-on information are added and transmitted. The value indicating the power-on information is 00H at the time of initial startup and 01H at the time of recovery startup. As a result, the value of the main control communication confirmation command at the time of initial startup becomes 10H, and the value of the main control communication confirmation command at the time of return startup becomes 11H. The value indicating the communication confirmation command and the value indicating the power-on information may be added each time the communication confirmation command is transmitted, may be added only for the first time, or the communication confirmation command is transmitted a predetermined number of times. It may be added every time during the period.

In the present embodiment, in step S276 described above, a value (00H) indicating the power-on information set in the main control communication confirmation command (value is 10H) and the power recovery processing (step S109) of the main control unit main processing. Alternatively, the value obtained by adding 01H) (that is, 10H or 11H) is set in the transmission data register and transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612. The main control communication confirmation command is transmitted at a timing of once every 100 ms as an example.

<Prize ball command setting process>
Next, the prize ball command setting process (step S273) in the above-mentioned serial command transmission process will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. Note that FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the flow of the prize ball command setting process.

In step S291, it is determined whether or not the prize ball command transmission condition is satisfied, and if it is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S292, and if it is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S298. Here, "when the prize ball command transmission condition is satisfied" means that in the above-mentioned prize acceptance process (step S216), the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, and the normal figure start port 228, Alternatively, when it is determined that the variable winning opening 234 has been won and the serial command status indicates 0 (a state in which the prize ball command can be transmitted), or the like is applicable.

In step S292, the variable winning opening number storage area 308a, the first special figure starting port winning ball number storage area 308b, the second special figure starting port winning ball number storage area 308c, and the general The number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 308d for the winning opening is updated. In the present embodiment, each time the prize ball command setting process is executed (every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is executed), the prize ball number storage area 308a for the variable winning opening → the first special figure start opening The number of prize balls stored in the storage area 308b → the storage area for the number of prize balls for the starting port 308c → the storage area for the number of prize balls for the general winning opening 308d. It is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the storage area is 1 or more. Then, when the number of prize balls is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of prize balls to update the number of prize balls, and the prize ball command corresponding to the referenced prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d is issued. Get from the table.

In step S293, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612 by setting the numerical value corresponding to the prize ball command acquired in step S292 in the transmission data register.

23 (a) to 23 (c) are diagrams showing an example of changes in the number of prize balls in the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d, and FIG. 23 (d) shows an example of the prize ball command table. It is a figure. In this example, in the Nth prize ball command setting process (N is a positive integer), the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 308b for the first special figure start port was 2 (00000010B). From, 1 is subtracted from the number of prize balls in the prize ball number storage area 308b for the first special figure starting port, and the number of prize balls is updated from 2 (00000010B) to 1 (00000001B). Further, from the prize ball command table shown in FIG. 3D, the prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure start port corresponding to the reference ball number storage area 308b for the first special figure start port is issued. The prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure start port is acquired and transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

Further, in the N + 1th prize ball command setting process, the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 308b for the first special figure start port was 1 (00000001B), so that for the first special figure start port. 1 is subtracted from the number of prize balls in the prize ball number storage area 308b, and the number of prize balls is updated from 1 (00000001B) to 0 (0000000000B). Further, from the prize ball command table shown in FIG. 3D, the prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure start port corresponding to the reference ball number storage area 308b for the first special figure start port is issued. The prize ball command (03H) for the first special figure start port is acquired and transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

Further, in the N + 2nd prize ball command setting process, since the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number storage area 308d for the general prize opening was 1 (00000001B), the prize ball number storage area 308d for the general prize opening was used. The number of prize balls is updated from 1 (00000001B) to 0 (0000000000B) by subtracting 1 from the number of prize balls. Further, from the prize ball command table shown in FIG. 3D, the prize ball command (0AH) for the general prize opening corresponding to the reference general prize ball number storage area 308d is acquired, and the general prize opening is obtained. A prize ball command (0AH) for the mouth is transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

Here, an example of subtracting one prize ball number in one prize ball command setting process is shown, but two or more prize balls may be subtracted in one prize ball command setting process. In this case, the number of winning balls of the same type of winning opening (or starting opening) may be subtracted, or the number of winning balls of different types of winning openings (or starting opening) may be subtracted. Further, the order of reference of the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d is not limited, and for example, the one with the largest number of prize balls may be referred to first, and the random value is acquired (for example, the first special figure start). You may refer to the opening 213 and the second special figure starting port 214) first. Further, the number of prize ball commands transmitted in one prize ball command setting process is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

Returning to FIG. 22, in step S294, the values of the prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d are read out, the values stored in the respective prize ball number storage areas 308a to 308d are added, and the total number of prize balls provided in the RAM 308. Store in the storage area. In step S295, it is determined whether or not the value of the total prize ball number storage area (total prize ball number) calculated in step S294 is a predetermined number (10 in this example) or more, and if applicable, step S296. If not applicable, the process proceeds to step S298.

In step S296, 10 is subtracted from the value of the total prize ball number storage area, and in the next step S297, 1 is added to the number of output requests provided in the RAM 308, and then the process returns to step S295. In step S298, the process ends after performing other prize ball command setting processes.

In this example, when it is determined in step S295 that the total number of prize balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the process of steps S296 and S297 is performed, and then the determination is returned to the determination in step S295. When the number of prize balls is 25, the number of output requests is set to 2 as a result of the processing of steps S296 and S297 being performed twice. However, the present invention is not limited to such processing. For example, after performing the processing of steps S296 and S297, the prize ball command setting process is once terminated, and the remaining output is output in the next and subsequent prize ball command setting processes. The number of requests may be added.

With such a configuration, in the previous example, the total number of prize balls is subtracted from 25 to 15 in step S296, the number of output requests is set to 1 in the subsequent step S297, and the next step of the prize ball command setting process. In S296, the total number of prize balls is subtracted from 15 to 5, and in the subsequent step S297, 1 is set in the number of output requests.

<Device monitoring process>
Next, the device monitoring process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. Note that FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing in the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In step S351, device information indicating the presence or absence of the above error is initially set. In step S352, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area are read out, the presence or absence of a specific error (specific abnormality) is monitored, and when the specific abnormality is detected, the process proceeds to step S353. On the other hand, if no specific abnormality is detected, the process proceeds to step S355.

In step S353, specific abnormality information (device information) indicating the error detected in step S352 is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and in step S354, the specific abnormality flag stored in the RAM 308 is set. Is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S355. The specific abnormality information is the abnormality information of one or a plurality of preset errors from the abnormality information about the above-mentioned error. In the present embodiment, the abnormality information of the magnetic abnormality error and the magnetic field abnormality error is set in advance as the specific abnormality information, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In step S355, a communication abnormality monitoring process (details will be described later) is performed, and in step S356, the status (device information) is updated based on other abnormal states. In step S357, it is determined whether or not the status (device information) has changed, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S358, and if not applicable, the process ends. In step S358, in order to output the main command corresponding to the changed status, the corresponding main command output request is set to ON, and the process ends.

<Abnormality monitoring process>
Next, the communication abnormality monitoring process (step S355) in the above-mentioned device monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 25. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of communication abnormality monitoring processing.

In step S371, it is determined whether the communication timeout flag is on or off by referring to the gaming machine frame information register 768d (see FIG. 8), and if it is on (communication with the payout control unit 600 is abnormal). If it occurs, the process proceeds to step S377, and if it is off (when no abnormality has occurred in communication with the payout control unit 600), the process proceeds to step S373. In step S373, the winning protection wait flag stored in the RAM is set to off, and in the next step S375, the winning protection wait timer stored in the RAM is reset (initialized), and then the process ends.

In step S377, it is determined whether the winning protection weight flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S381, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S385. In step S381, the winning protection wait flag is set to on, and in the next step S383, a predetermined value (in this example, a numerical value corresponding to 5 seconds) is set in the winning protection wait timer, and then the process ends.

In step S385, 1 is subtracted from the winning protection wait timer, and in the next step S387, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning protection wait timer subtracted in step S385 is 0. As a result of this determination, if the winning protection wait timer is not 0, the process ends, while if the winning protection wait timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S389 to set the communication abnormality flag to ON, and the next step. After setting the winning protection weight flag to off in S391, the process ends.

<Specific example of communication error handling>
Next, the communication abnormality processing executed by the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. Note that FIG. 26 is a time chart showing an example of communication abnormality processing in chronological order.

As described above, the main control unit 300 determines whether the communication timeout flag is on or off (whether the communication with the payout control unit 600 is abnormal) in the communication abnormality monitoring process (step 355) of the device monitoring process (step S232). If there is an error in the communication with the payout control unit 600, the wait time (this) is measured by the winning protection wait timer instead of immediately setting the communication error flag to ON. In the example, the communication abnormality flag is set to be turned on after waiting for the elapse of 5 seconds).

Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the communication with the payout control unit 600, the processing of steps S215 to S235 of the main control unit timer interrupt processing is not immediately interrupted, and the wait time elapses. Until this is done, the execution of the processes of steps S215 to S235 is continued. Therefore, even if a communication abnormality occurs during the game, it is possible to continue the control related to the game until the wait time elapses, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is disadvantaged due to the communication abnormality. In some cases.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 26A, a communication abnormality occurs at the timing indicated by the reference numeral T1, but since the winning protection wait timer is activated due to the communication abnormality, the timing indicated by the reference numeral T1 at which the communication abnormality occurs is started. The process of steps S215 to S235 of the main control unit timer interrupt process is not interrupted until the timing indicated by the reference numeral T2 at which the wait time Wt1 by the winning protection wait timer elapses. Therefore, during the period from the reference numeral T1 to the reference numeral T2, it is possible to control the game and accept the winning even if the communication is abnormal.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 26B, a communication abnormality occurs at the timing indicated by the reference numeral T3, but before the wait time Wt1 by the winning protection wait timer elapses (after the elapse of the time Wt2 (<Wt1)). In addition, the communication abnormality is resolved at the timing indicated by the reference numeral T4, and the communication timeout flag is turned off. Therefore, in this example, during the period from the reference numeral T3 to the reference numeral T4, it is possible to control the game even in a communication abnormality state, it is possible to accept a prize, and the control related to the game is interrupted even once. It is possible to return to the state before the occurrence of the communication abnormality (the state immediately before the timing indicated by the reference numeral T3) without any problem.

On the other hand, the main control unit 300 monitors whether or not there is a specific abnormality in the communication abnormality monitoring process (step 355) of the device monitoring process (step S232), and if a specific abnormality is detected, the specific abnormality detection flag is immediately detected. Is configured to be turned on. Therefore, when a specific abnormality is detected, the processing of steps S215 to S235 of the main control unit timer interrupt processing is immediately interrupted. Therefore, if a specific abnormality occurs during the game, the control related to the game is not continued, and the game progresses while the specific abnormality occurs, which causes a disadvantage to the player. It may be possible to avoid it.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 26 (c), a specific abnormality occurs at the timing indicated by reference numeral T5 after the communication abnormality described with reference to FIG. 26 (b) is resolved. In this example, since the processing of steps S215 to S235 of the main control unit timer interrupt processing is immediately interrupted due to the occurrence of the specific abnormality, control related to the game becomes impossible at almost the same timing as the occurrence of the specific abnormality, and the prize is accepted. Is also impossible. In this example, the specific abnormality is resolved at the timing indicated by the reference numeral T6, but when the specific abnormality occurs, the RAM is cleared, the authentication is completed, and the recovery is completed (until the specific abnormality is completed (). Unless the power is turned off once and then turned on again), the communication error flag including the specific communication error flag is not set to off, and the main control unit timer interrupt process is not executed (unless the power is turned off and then turned on again). Control over the game remains stopped).

Next, the configuration of the RAM (buffer area) 708, which is the storage area of the present embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram showing an example of items stored in each storage area provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. Further, FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the storage areas provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 and the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and the timing of initialization of the storage areas.

The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 store the game state at the time of power failure in the RAMs 308 and 708 by the power cutoff process in order to restore the game state at the time of power failure / recovery (for example, at the time of power failure recovery). , The contents of RAM are retained by the backup power supply.

As a configuration of the backup function of the pachinko machine 100, a backup power supply unit, a power supply monitoring circuit, and a RAM clear switch are provided, although not shown. The RAM clear switch initializes the backed up RAM data.

As shown in FIG. 27, the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is provided with a first area 708A from the small address (here, 7F00H) to the address 7F0DH and a second area 708B from the address 7F0EH to the address 7FFFH. Has been done. The first area 708A is further divided into a plurality of storage areas, and for example, a prize ball number, a game ball number, a game information, an error state, an untransmitted command, a program start state flag, a power supply state information, and the like are stored. On the other hand, the second area 708B is divided into a setting pointer storage area, an analysis pointer storage area, a reception command buffer area, and the like. The received command buffer area is an area in which received commands are stored, and the setting pointer storage area and the analysis pointer storage area are areas in which pointers used for storage processing of received commands are stored. The setting pointer storage area, analysis pointer storage area, and reception command buffer area will be described later.

The first area 708A is an area in which the stored information is saved (backed up) when the power is turned off, and the second area 708B is an area that is initialized immediately after the power is turned on. For example, in the initialization process in which the power failure is not detected (for example, step S115 in FIG. 9), all of these storage areas are initialized (cleared), and in the return activation, only a part of them is initialized (for example). clear. That is, in the initialization process, the first region 708A and the second region 708B are cleared, but when a power failure occurs, only the information in the first region 708A is backed up. Then, in the subsequent power recovery processing, the information backed up in the predetermined area of the RAM 708 is restored (set) in the first area, and only the second area 708B is cleared. As described above, there are a plurality of timings for clearing the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and there are also a plurality of areas for clearing (first area 708A, second area 708B). Further, the second area 702B may be cleared even when the payout control unit 600 is restored and activated, and is not backed up even when a power failure occurs. In other words, the area for storing received commands (received command buffer area), the setting pointer storage area used for the storage process, and the analysis pointer storage area (values of each pointer) may be cleared even when recovery is started. , It becomes an area that is not backed up when the power is cut off. With such a configuration, the second area is cleared immediately after the power of the payout control unit 600 is turned on, regardless of whether the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are initially started or returned. This may prevent the prize ball command or the like from being transmitted to the payout control unit 600 at an unintended timing.

Although not shown here, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 may have the same configuration. That is, it may have a first area that is backed up when a power failure occurs and a second area that is cleared by the subsequent power recovery process. The information stored in the first area of the main control unit 300 is, for example, a jackpot state (including the number of rounds), a high probability / time saving state, a random value of the reserved memory (special symbol, normal symbol), an error state, and not yet. The transmission command, the operating state of the movable member (ordinary electric accessory, type 1 special electric accessory), and the like. Further, even in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, when a power failure occurs, only the information stored in the first area may be backed up.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the initialization timing of the first region and the second region of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 27. In this embodiment, a plurality of timings for initializing the RAM 708 are provided. In the figure, the first timing is the timing immediately after each power-on of the payout control unit 600, and the second timing is the timing of processing when the main control communication confirmation command is received. The timing immediately after the power of the payout control unit 600 is turned on will be described later.

(1) When both the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are initially activated, etc.

In this case, at the first timing, neither the first region 708A nor the second region 708B is initialized, and at the second timing, neither the first region 708A nor the second region 708B is initialized. ..

(2) The same as in (1) when the main control unit 300 is the return start and the payout control unit 600 is the initial start.
(3) When the main control unit 300 is initially activated and the payout control unit 600 is restored and activated In this case, only the second area 708B is initialized at the first timing, and the first area is initialized at the second timing. Only 708A is initialized.
(4) When both the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 are restored and activated In this case, only the second area 708B is initialized at the first timing, and both areas are initialized at the second timing. Not converted.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S2501 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S2501. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S2503, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S2505.

In step S2505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S2507, command processing is performed. In this command processing, the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 is referred to, it is determined whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300 (whether or not there is an unprocessed command), and if there is an unprocessed command, it is determined. , Performs the process corresponding to the command.

For example, when a start command is received from the main control unit 300, in the effect control process of step S2509 described later, a setting changing notification (for example, a decorative symbol) is notified that the setting is being changed (or the setting is being confirmed). Processing such as reading out the effect data for performing the display by the display device 208 and the audio output from the speaker 120) from the ROM 406 is performed.

By this processing, for example, the setting changing notification (for example, an image including the character string "setting is being changed") is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the setting changing notification is displayed from the speaker 120. (For example, the voice "Settings are being changed") is output. The means for notifying during the setting change is not limited to the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120, and may be an LED, a movable body, or the like.

Further, when a power-on command is received from the main control unit 300, in the effect control process of step S2509, which will be described later, the notification during the setting change is deleted, and the power-on notification for notifying that the power is turned on is a decorative symbol. Processing such as reading the effect data to be displayed on the display device 208 from the ROM 406 is performed.

By this processing, for example, a power-on notification (for example, an image including the character strings "RAM cleared" and "power-on") is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the speaker 120 Outputs a setting change notification (for example, a voice saying "RAM has been cleared" or "power has been turned on"). The means for notifying the power-on is not limited to the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120, and may be an LED, a movable body, or the like.

In step S2509, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S2507, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S2511, when the press of the chance button is detected, the effect data updated in step S2509 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button. In step S2513, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S2509, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

In step S2515, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S2509, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S2517, if there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S2509, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S2519, if there is a command to the cloaking device 246 in the effect data read in step S2509, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S2521, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S2509, a setting is made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S2503.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S2601 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S2701 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S2503 in the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step SC03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S2703 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S2521, and the effect random value value is updated.

Next, the image control process in step S2513 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S2801, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 434 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 406 to VRAM 436. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S2803, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S2805. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S2805, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S2801, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP434. The VDP434 sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S2807, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S2809, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF11. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered. In step S2811, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S3003, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3005. In step S3005, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S3007, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. In step S3009, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S3007, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S3011, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S3013, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516 and the process returns to step S3003.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S3101 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S3003 in the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S3003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S3203 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

<Invention 1 of the present application>
As described above, the gaming table according to the invention 1 of the present application (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the slot machine) is a notifying means capable of notifying (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 1 and 4). , Speaker 120 shown in FIG. 4, various lamps 418 shown in FIG. 4, game frame lamp 532 shown in FIG. 4, game table frame lamp 542 shown in FIG. 4, effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 4, LED not shown). A main control means capable of executing a plurality of types of processing (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4) and a sub control means capable of controlling the notification means (for example, the first sub control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4). ), And one of the plurality of types of processes is a process related to activation of the sub-control means (hereinafter, referred to as "first process", for example, FIG. 18 and FIG. The first process S1) shown in 19, one of the plurality of types of processes is a process started after the first process, and is a command relating to the start start of the sub-control means. (For example, a process of transmitting (for example, an activation command) to the sub-control means (hereinafter, referred to as “second process”), for example, the second process S2 shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, and the plurality of types. One of the processes of is more than the second process when the power is turned on in a state where the set value can be changed (for example, the RAM clear switch 180 is ON and the setting key is ON). The process to be started later is a process related to setting (hereinafter, referred to as "third process"; for example, the third process S3 shown in FIG. 19, setting confirmation process, setting change process), and the plurality of types are described above. One of the processes is a process started after the third process, and is a lottery process (for example, a general drawing-related lottery process shown in FIG. 15, a special figure 1 related lottery process, and a special figure 2). A process composed of a plurality of types of processes including a lottery process such as a related lottery process (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth process”; for example, a fourth process S4 shown in FIGS. 18 and 19), which is the sub-process. The control means is notifying the third process based on the command related to the start of activation (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain notification". For example, a setting confirmation notification to notify that the setting is being confirmed, or a setting change is being performed. It is a means capable of executing control to cause the notification means to execute a setting changing notification to notify that, and the third process accepts a certain operation (for example, an operation of turning the setting key from ON to OFF). This is a process that ends when the third process is completed, and the fourth process is a certain period (for example, for example) after the third process is completed. In the initial start or return start shown in FIG. 18, the period from the end of the second process S2 until the interrupt function limitation counter becomes 0, and in the setting change or setting confirmation shown in FIG. 19, the third process. S3 is Ri processing der the period from the end to the interrupt function limit counter reaches 0) is started when the elapsed, the one of the processing among the plurality of types of processing, in the fourth process A process for updating the random value used in the lottery process (hereinafter, referred to as a "fifth process". ), The fifth process is a process started before the third process .

As a process after the power of the main control means is turned on, a wait time is provided to ensure the activation of the sub control means, and after the wait time elapses, a start start command is sent to the sub control means to shift to the normal gaming state. According to such processing, since a wait time is provided between the time when the power is turned on by the operation of the operator and the transition to the normal gaming state, it is possible to specify the processing timing regarding the profit of the player in the normal gaming state. It gets harder.

However, when the setting change process is combined with such a process, a command for notifying the sub-control means that the setting is being changed is sent after the wait time elapses, and the setting change process is completed until the setting change is completed. Is performed, and after the setting change process is completed, the game state is shifted to the normal game state.

In this case, if the process shifts to the normal game state immediately after the setting change process that can be completed at an arbitrary timing of the operator, it becomes easy to specify the process timing related to the profit of the player in the normal game state. In order to solve such a problem, it is conceivable to execute the process related to the sub-control means (process such as wait, command transmission, etc.) after the setting change process, but in this case, it means that the setting is being changed. Since it becomes impossible to notify, the convenience of the game clerk is lowered, and there arises a problem that it becomes difficult to detect an illegal setting change process.

According to the game console according to the invention 1 of the present application, it is possible to grasp that the power is turned on in a state where the set value can be changed, so that the convenience of the work related to the setting by the clerk of the game store can be improved. At the same time, it is possible to make it easier to detect fraudulent activities. Further, since the fourth process is started when a certain period of time has passed after the third process is completed, the timing at which the fourth process is started (the timing of the process related to the player's profit) is specified. It can be difficult and it is possible to prevent fraudulent activities.

Further, the certain notification may be a notification that may be continuously executed for the certain period even after the completion of the third process.

With such a configuration, it is difficult to specify the end timing of the third process, so that it is more difficult to specify the timing when the fourth process is started (the timing of the process related to the interest of the player). It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities.

Further, one of the plurality of types of processes is a process of updating a random number value used in the lottery process in the fourth process (hereinafter, referred to as a "fifth process"), for example, FIG. The basic random number initial value update process of the main control unit main process, the basic random number initial value update process, and the basic random number update process of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15), and the fifth process is the fifth process. It may be a process started before the third process.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The random number value used in the lottery process is only the software random number used in the basic random number initial value update process or the basic random number update process, or the basic random number initial value update process or the basic random number update process. It may be only the hardware random number used. Further, the random number value used in the lottery process may be only a software random number in various lottery performed using both a hardware random number and a software random number, or a software random number in various lottery performed using only software random numbers. May be only.

With such a configuration, it becomes more difficult to specify the generation timing of the random number value used in the normal game, so that it is possible to make it more difficult to specify the timing of the processing related to the profit of the player, and the fraudulent activity can be prevented. It becomes possible to prevent.

The fifth process may be a process started before the first process, and in this case, the fifth process may be executed even during the execution of the first process. ..

Further, one of the plurality of types of processes is a process of transmitting a certain command (for example, a power-on command) including setting information regarding the set value to the sub-control means in the certain period (for example). Hereinafter, it is referred to as “sixth process”), and the fourth process is started when a predetermined period different from the certain period has elapsed after the sixth process is completed. It may be.

With such a configuration, since the fourth process is started when the sixth process is completed and a predetermined period has elapsed, the timing when the fourth process is started (process related to the profit of the player). It is possible to make it more difficult to identify the timing) and prevent fraudulent activities.

Further, a counter (for example, an interrupt function limited counter) is provided, and the main control means is configured to be able to update the count value of the counter, and when the first condition is satisfied, the third process is performed. Configured to be initiated, the first condition is that the count value is the first specific value (eg, the first specific value shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 (eg, 250 of a numerical value corresponding to 1000 ms)). ) Is a condition that can be satisfied, and when the second condition is satisfied, the second process is started. The second condition is that the count value is It is a condition that can be satisfied when the first specific value is reached, and is configured so that the fourth process is started when the third condition is satisfied, and the third condition is It may be a condition that can be satisfied when the count value becomes the second specific value (for example, the second specific value (for example, 0) shown in FIGS. 18 and 19).

With such a configuration, one counter can control the start timing and end timing of a plurality of types of processing, so that the control load can be reduced and the storage capacity for the counter can be reduced. It is possible to effectively utilize the limited storage capacity.

Further, when the fourth condition is satisfied, the sixth process is started, and in the fourth condition, the count value is a third specific value (for example, FIG. 18 or FIG. It may be a condition that can be satisfied when the third specific value shown in 19 (for example, 125 of a numerical value corresponding to 500 ms) is reached.

With such a configuration, one counter can control the start timing and end timing of a plurality of types of processing, so that the control load can be reduced and the storage capacity for the counter can be reduced. It is possible to effectively utilize the limited storage capacity.

Further, a door that can be opened and closed (for example, a front frame door 106 and a door with a ball storage plate 108 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the sub-control means notifies the sixth process based on the certain command (hereinafter, , "First specific notification". For example, the power-on notification for notifying that the power has been turned on) is a means capable of executing the control to execute the notification means, and the sub-control means is the door. In the open state, a speaker that displays an image including the character string "door is open" in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the first notification mode. It is a means capable of executing control to cause the notification means to execute (such as outputting a voice saying "the door is open" from 120), and the sub-control means is the second when the door is closed. In the notification mode (a notification mode different from the first notification mode), an image including the character string "door closed" is displayed in the display area of the second specific notification (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208). Control to cause the notification means to output a sound "door closed" from the speaker 120, display nothing in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, do not output sound from the speaker 120, etc.) It is a viable means, and the sub-control means is in a certain state (for example, a certain state after the initial start-up or the return start-up shown in FIG. 18) in which the third process is not executed after the power is turned on. When the door changes from the opened state to the closed state, the second specific notification is executed by the notification means in the second notification mode, and the door is released from the closed state. It is a means capable of initiating control to cause the notification means to execute the second specific notification in the first notification mode when the state is changed to the above-mentioned state, and the sub-control means is the third processing. In the state in which the above-mentioned second specific notification is executed, the second specific notification is not executed by the notification means regardless of whether the door is open or the door is closed. In a certain state after executing the third process, when the door changes from an open state to a closed state, after the first specific notification is completed, the first notification mode is described. The second specific notification may be a means capable of initiating control to cause the notification means to execute the second specific notification in the second notification mode without causing the notification means to execute the second specific notification.

With such a configuration, the operator is set because the second specific notification is not performed regardless of the open / closed state of the door in the state where the third process (for example, the process related to the setting change) is being executed. While it is possible to concentrate on the change work, it is possible to confirm that the setting change has been made in a normal manner by notifying when the door changes from the open state to the closed state, and it is far away. It may be easier for the person in charge at the office to confirm the completion of the work. Further, in order to cause the notification means to execute the second specific notification in the second notification mode without causing the notification means to execute the second specific notification in the first notification mode, the door was opened and closed by changing the setting. It is possible to grasp that and improve convenience. In addition, since the second specific notification is not given regardless of the open / closed state of the door, the notification should be given when the door changes from the open state to the closed state after being alert to the fraudster. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement store can notice the fraudulent activity, and the cheating person who is not careful can be suppressed on the spot.

Further, a regulation process (for example, a certain numerical value (for example, 1) from the count value of the counter) that regulates the count value of the counter so as not to reach the second specific value until the third process is completed is performed. The process of adding the certain numerical value after subtraction, the process of adding a certain numerical value (for example, 1) from the count value of the counter and then subtracting the certain numerical value, and the count value of the counter after subtraction (or addition) When a second specific value is reached, subtraction (or addition) may be performed to update the count value of the counter to a value other than the second specific value).

With such a configuration, since the end timing of the third process can be controlled by one counter, the control load can be reduced and the storage capacity for the counter can be reduced. , The limited storage capacity can be effectively utilized.

Further, the main control means includes a subtraction process of subtracting a certain value (for example, 1) from the count value of the counter in a certain cycle (for example, once every 4 ms), and the counter in the certain cycle. The main control means starts the subtraction process when the first process is started, and the addition process of adding the certain value to the count value of the above. The addition process may be started when the third process is started, and the addition process may be ended when the third process is completed.

Further, the main control means includes a subtraction process of subtracting a certain value (for example, 1) from the count value of the counter in a certain cycle (for example, once every 4 ms), and the counter in the certain cycle. The main control means starts the addition process when the first process is started, and the addition process of adding the certain value to the count value of the above. The subtraction process may be started when the third process is started, and the subtraction process may be terminated when the third process is completed.

With such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the count value of the counter has reached the second specific value, and if applicable, the count value of the counter is subtracted (or added) to count the counter. Compared to the case where the process of updating the value to a value other than the second specific value is adopted, the program may be simplified and the program capacity may be reduced, and the limited storage capacity can be effectively utilized. ..

Further, the main control means is a game information output means (for example, a step of the setting management process shown in FIG. 17) capable of outputting game information to a game management device (for example, a hall controller) separate from the game table. (Processing of S2103), the main control means can output the game information to the game management device after transmitting a command relating to the activation start of the sub control means (for example, the pachinko machine 100 has a hole). In the state of being connected to the computer), the game information output means provides information regarding the start start of the main control means (for example, start other than return start or initial start (start by RAM error, setting change, or setting confirmation)). It may be configured to output a security signal indicating that there is.

Further, in the state in which the sub-control means is executing the third process, the sub-control means of the main control means regardless of whether the door is open or the door is closed. It may be configured not to output information about the start-up (for example, a security signal indicating that the start-up is a start-up other than the return start-up or the initial start-up (RAM error, setting change, or start-up by confirming the setting)).

<Payout control unit main processing>
The payout control unit 600 includes a CPU, a RAM 708, a ROM, an I / O port, and a voltage monitoring circuit. These CPU, RAM708, ROM, and I / O port are composed of one microcomputer (microcomputer for payout control). Further, the payout control microcomputer may have some functions the same as those of the main control microcomputer described in the present specification, and may not have, for example, some functions (for example, a random number circuit). In the voltage monitoring circuit included in the payout control unit 600, the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply management unit 650 to the payout control unit 600 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment), similarly to the voltage monitoring circuit included in the main control unit 300. When it is less than 9.66V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the CPU of the payout control unit 600. Even if the low voltage signal is output from the voltage monitoring circuit 338 of the main control unit 300, the low voltage signal may not be output from the voltage monitoring circuit of the payout control unit 600.

A command including power-on information is transmitted from the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600. Based on receiving this command, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 starts the payout control unit main process. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit interrupt process is not performed when the command is received, but the payout control unit interrupt process is performed by the timer interrupt. However, depending on the setting of the serial communication circuit, the payout control unit interrupt process can also be performed when the command is received.

The payout control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit main process.

First, in step S301, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU of the payout control unit 600. In step S302, it is determined whether or not a low voltage signal is output from the voltage monitoring circuit of the payout control unit 600, that is, whether or not the low voltage signal is on. When the low voltage signal is on (when power interruption is detected), the process of step S302 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power interruption is not detected), step S303 is performed. move on.

In step S303, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later in the counter timer, a setting of permitting the payout control unit 600 to write to the RAM 708, and I Make initial settings for the / O port.

In step S304, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and if it is not returned to the state before the power is cut off (when the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state), step S305 To return to the state before the power failure, the process proceeds to step S306. Specifically, in this step S304, the same processing as in step S107 of the main control unit main processing is performed, and when it is necessary to clear the RAM, the process proceeds to step S305 in order to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. On the other hand, when it is not necessary to clear the RAM, the power status information is read from the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and when the power status information is not the information indicating suspend, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the initial state in step S305. If the information indicates suspend, a checksum is executed for the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and if the checksum result is normal, the process proceeds to step S306 to return to the state before the power failure. If the checksum result is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S305 to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer, and a predetermined area (for example, all storage areas) of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is initialized.

In step S306, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery processing, of the storage area of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, the storage area to be cleared at the time of power recovery is initialized. That is, since the state of this step is the first timing (the state immediately after the power of the payout control unit 600 is turned on), the first area 708A and the second area 708B are cleared for initial startup or the like. If it is a return start, only the second area 708B is cleared (see FIG. 22).

In step S307, the initial setting 3 is performed. In this initial setting 3, a part of the error information provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is cleared, interrupt permission is set, and the like.

In step S308, it is determined whether or not there is unanalyzed data in the data input from the main control unit 300. Here, a process of comparing the value referred to by the setting pointer of the RAM 708 and the value referred to by the analysis pointer is performed for determination, which will be described later. As a result of the determination, if there is unanalyzed data, the command analysis process is performed in step S309, and if there is no unanalyzed data, the process proceeds to step S310.

In step S310, it is determined whether or not there is an untransmitted command, and if there is an untransmitted command, the process proceeds to step S311. If there is no untransmitted command, the process proceeds to step S312.

In step S311, the untransmitted command is set in the transmission data register 776 of the microprocessor 770 on the payout control unit side, and is output as a transmission command.

In step S312, as in step S302, it monitors whether or not the low voltage signal is off, and if the low voltage signal is off (when the power interruption is not detected), the process returns to step S308 and the low voltage is returned. If the signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S313.

In step S313, the power failure processing is performed. In this power failure processing, the current stack pointer value is stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600, and information indicating suspend is set in the power supply status storage area described above. Further, all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 is added to a register having a 1-byte structure having an initial value of 0, and a numerical storage area for checksum calculation is added. The value obtained by subtracting the addition result from the value stored in is calculated as a checksum (checksum at the time of power failure), and the calculated checksum at the time of power failure is stored in the above-mentioned numerical storage area for checksum calculation. Settings such as prohibiting writing to the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 are made. Further, only the first area 708A of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600 backs up the stored information.

In step S314 after that, the process of monitoring whether or not the low voltage signal is off is performed as in step S302, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power interruption is not detected), the payout control unit is used. Returning to the beginning of the main process (step S301), if the low voltage signal is on, step S314 is repeatedly executed.

<Payout control unit interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the payout control unit interrupt process executed by the payout control unit 600 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit interrupt processing. The payout control unit 600 includes a counter timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Start.

In step S401, the register value is saved, in step S402, the interrupt flag is cleared, and in step S403, the WDT is cleared and restarted. Further, in step S404, the reception command is processed. In this process, it is determined whether or not a command is received from the main control unit 300 (for example, reception of a prize ball command), and if it is received, the received command data is set in the reception command buffer area.

In step S405, it is determined whether or not the main control communication confirmation command has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S406, and if not, the process proceeds to step S414. As described above, since the main control unit 300 receives the power supply from the payout control unit 600, its activation is delayed from that of the payout control unit 600. Therefore, in this step, a determination process is performed in order to wait for the subsequent processes of steps S406 to S413 until the main control unit 300 is activated.

In step S406, port input processing is performed. In this port input process, the value of the I / O port is acquired to detect the status of various sensors. Specifically, the state of various signals input from the card unit 608 via the interface unit 606, the state of the ball payout signal input from the payout sensor 604, the state of the signal input from the lower plate sensor, the state of the signal input from the error release switch, etc. Is acquired and stored in the input signal information storage area provided in the RAM.

In step S407, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the main control communication monitoring timer, the lending request waiting timer and the lending instruction waiting timer provided in the RAM, the on / off time of the payout notification LED, the motor drive / non-drive time, etc. are measured. Update various timers including timers.

In step S408, error management processing is performed. In this error management process, it is monitored whether or not there is an abnormality in communication with the main control unit 300, it is determined whether or not various errors have occurred, and information about the error is stored in the error status storage area provided in the RAM. Remember.

In step S409, CR unit communication processing is performed. In this CR unit communication process, communication with the card unit 608 is performed based on the states of various signals input from the card unit 608 via the interface unit 606. For example, when a game ball lending request signal is received from the card unit 608, the number of lending requests included in the lending request signal is added to the payout number information of the lending number storage unit, which will be described later.

In step S410, the payout management process is performed. In this payout management process, the payout device 552 is controlled. In step S411, signal output processing is performed. In this signal output processing, the signal to be output to the outside from the external terminal board (not shown) is controlled.

In step S412, the transmission command setting process is performed. In this transmission command setting process, various commands to be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 are set. These various commands also include commands related to errors. In this specification, "error" is referred to as "error" in this specification such as payout quantity switch error, illegal payout error, payout excess error, lower plate full tank error, payout error, main control communication error, door open error, etc. Includes everything you have done. Further, in step S413, port output processing is performed. In this port output process, for example, when the pachinko machine 100 is in an error state, an LED for notifying the player that an error has occurred (for example, an LED arranged on the upper part of the pachinko machine 100). ) Is turned on, and when the error is resolved, the LED is turned off. For example, when the overpayment error flag provided in the RAM 708 is set, the LED for notifying the player that an overpayment error has occurred is turned on, and the overpayment error flag is cleared. If so, the LED is turned off. Further, when the lower plate full tank error flag provided in the RAM 708 is set, the LED for notifying the player that the lower plate full tank error has occurred is turned on, and the lower plate full tank error is turned on. When the flag is cleared, the LED is turned off.

In step S414, the register value is restored, and in step S415, the process ends after the interrupt enable setting is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the process of storing the received command in the RAM 708 (buffer) is performed by the receive command process (step S404) of the payout control unit interrupt process, and the process of analyzing the command is the payout control unit main process. This is performed in the command analysis process (step S309) of.

<Receive command processing (Example A, Example B)>
FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the details of the receive command process (step S404) of the payout control unit interrupt process shown in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 (a) shows an example (Example A) of the receive command process. It is a flowchart, and FIG. 33B is a flowchart showing another example (Example B) of receiving command processing.

In the reception command processing of the embodiment A with reference to FIG. 3A, first, in step S501, the specific bit (reception data full flag) of the status register 772 of the microcomputer 770 for the payout control unit is referred to, and the main control is performed. It is determined from unit 400 whether or not a command has been received. The received data full flag is set when there is data in the received data register 774. When a command transmitted from the main control unit 400 is received by the reception data register of the microcomputer 770 for the payout control unit, the reception command is stored in the A register 722. If there is a command received in the A register 722, the process proceeds to step S502, and if not, the process ends.

In step S502, the receive command of the A register 722 is stored in the buffer of the RAM 708 (the receive command buffer area provided in the second area 708B) by using the pointer (described later).

In the A embodiment, when there is a received command, the received command is always stored in the received command buffer area. Commands that should not be accepted (illegal commands) are excluded in the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process.

Further, referring to FIG. 3B, in the reception command processing of the second embodiment, first, in step S601, the reception data register of the microcomputer 770 for the payout control unit is referred to, and the command is received from the main control unit 400. Determine the presence or absence. If there is a received command, the process proceeds to step S602, and if not, the process ends.

In step S602, it is determined whether or not the main control communication confirmation command has been received from the main control unit 300. If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S604, and if not, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, it is confirmed whether or not the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S604, and if not, the process ends. The prize ball command acceptance permission flag will be described later (FIG. 38).

In step S604, the receive command is stored in the buffer of the RAM 708 (the receive command buffer area provided in the second area 708B).

In the B embodiment, if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on, the commands other than the main control communication confirmation command are stored in the buffer (the reception command buffer area provided in the second area 708B). More specifically, the data of the reception data register 774, which is a serial communication-related register of the payout control unit microcomputer 770, is stored in the CUP core register 720, for example, the A register 722, and then in the second area 708B. Store in the provided receive command buffer area. Alternatively, the data in the reception data register 774 of the microcomputer 770 for the payout control unit is directly stored in the reception command buffer area.

That is, also in this case, the command that should not be accepted (illegal command) is excluded in the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process. Before the determination process in step S1603, a process for determining whether or not the received command is a prize ball command may be performed. As a result, when a command that should not be originally received (for example, a command other than the main control communication confirmation command or the prize ball command) is received, it can be excluded by the determination process.

<Command analysis processing>
The command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process of FIG. 31 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the process flow of the command analysis process (Example C), and FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the process flow of another command analysis process (Example D). For example, when the process shown in FIG. 34 (Example C) is performed as the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process shown in FIG. 31, the receive command process of the payout control unit interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 (step S309). In step S404), the process of FIG. 33 (a) (Example A) is performed. Further, when the process shown in FIG. 35 (Example D) is performed as the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process shown in FIG. 31, the receive command process (step) of the payout control interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is performed. In S404), the process of FIG. 33 (b) (Example B) is performed. Alternatively, the process may be a combination of the received command process of Example A and the command analysis process of Example C or Example D. Further, not limited to this, the received command processing of Examples A and B and the command analysis processing of Examples C and D can be appropriately combined as long as there is no problem in control.

The command analysis process of Example C will be described with reference to FIG. 34. In step S701, the receive command stored in the receive command buffer area of the RAM 708 is acquired. In step S702, a process of analyzing the acquired received command is performed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to the figures in FIGS. 43 and 43 onward.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not the main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 has been received. This main control communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 by the serial command transmission process of the main control unit 300. If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S706, and if not, the process proceeds to step S704.

In step S704, the main control communication confirmation command reception process is performed. The main control communication confirmation command reception process will be described later. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the received command is a prize ball command. If the receiving command is a prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S706, and if not, the process ends. In this step, if the received command is neither the main control communication confirmation command nor the prize ball command, the command analysis process is terminated without processing the received command.

In step S706, it is determined whether or not the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S707, and if not, the process ends. In step S707, processing at the time of receiving the prize ball command is performed. The processing at the time of receiving the prize ball command will be described later.

The command analysis process of the D embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 35. In step S801, the receive command stored in the receive command buffer area of the RAM 708 is acquired.

In step S802, a process of analyzing the acquired received command is performed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to the figures in FIGS. 43 and 43 onward. In step S803, it is determined whether or not the main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 has been received. This main control communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 by the serial command transmission process of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. If the main control communication confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S805, and if not, the process proceeds to step S804.

In step S804, it is determined whether or not the received command is a prize ball command. If the receiving command is a prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S806, and if not, the process ends. In step S806, the process at the time of receiving the prize ball command is performed. The processing at the time of receiving the prize ball command will be described later.

The process of determining the prize ball command acceptance permission flag (step S603 in FIG. 33B, step S706 in FIG. 34) may be performed in both the received command process and the command analysis process. For example, the process of determining the prize ball command acceptance permission flag may be performed in the reception command process of Example A (FIG. 33 (a)), and the prize ball command acceptance permission may be performed in the command analysis process of Example D (FIG. 35). The process of determining the flag may be performed.

<Processing at the time of receiving the main control communication confirmation command (Example E)>
Next, the main control communication confirmation command reception processing (steps S704 and S805) in the command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. 36A. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart showing the flow of processing when the main control communication confirmation command is received.

In step S901, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is the first main control communication confirmation command received after the payout control unit 500 is activated, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S902, which is not applicable. In the case, the process proceeds to step S904. Whether or not it is the first received main control communication confirmation command is determined by determining whether or not the main control communication confirmation command received flag provided in the RAM 708 is off, and the main control communication confirmation command received flag is off. If so, the process proceeds to step S902.

In step S902, after setting the main control communication confirmation command received flag to on, the process proceeds to step S903 to execute the activation process (details will be described later). In step S904, the initial value (500 in this example) is set in the main control communication monitoring timer, and in the next step S905, the main control communication error flag is set to off. Further, in step S906, the process ends after the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to on.

<Startup process>
Next, the activation process (step S903) in the process at the time of receiving the main control communication confirmation command will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (b). Note that FIG. 3B is a flowchart showing the flow of startup processing.

In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is the initial activation, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not applicable, the process ends. The determination in this step is made by referring to the value of the lower 4 bits of the value of the main control communication confirmation command (10H at the initial start-up, 11H at the return start-up) transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600. do. That is, when the value of the main control communication confirmation command is 10H, the process proceeds to step S1002, and when the value of the main control communication confirmation command is 11H, the process ends. Here, once it is determined that the value of the main control communication confirmation command is 10H, the value of the main control communication confirmation command will always be the value of the main control communication confirmation command until the next initial startup. Is 11H), so even if the main control communication confirmation command is received after the next time, the value of the lower 4 bits will not be referred to. After transmitting 11H on the main control unit 300 side, 10H may be transmitted.

In step S1002, the payout control unit 600 determines whether or not the payout control unit 600 is a return start (start to return to the state before the power failure), proceeds to step S1003 if applicable, and ends the process if not applicable. ..

In step S1003, all interrupts including the timer interrupt that activates the payout control unit interrupt processing are disabled, and in the subsequent step S1004, a part of the RAM 708 is initialized. The area initialized here is the initial activation of the main control unit 300 (step S1001) and the return activation of the payout control unit 600 (step S1002), and the second timing (when the main control communication confirmation command is received). Therefore, only the first region 708A of the RAM 708 is initialized.

In step S1005 following step S1004, all interrupts including the timer interrupt that activates the payout control unit interrupt processing are permitted, and the processing is terminated.

<Processing when receiving a prize ball command (Example F, Example G)>
The processing at the time of receiving the prize ball command (step S707 of FIG. 34 or step S806 of FIG. 35) will be described with reference to FIG. 37. 37 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the prize ball command reception processing (Example F) of step S707 of FIG. 34, and FIG. 37 (b) is the time of receiving the prize ball command of step S806 of FIG. 35. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process (Example G).

The processing at the time of receiving the prize ball command of Example F will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (a). First, in step S1101, all interrupts including the timer interrupt that activates the payout control unit interrupt process are prohibited.

In the next step S1102, the number of prize balls is added to the next prize ball number area based on the analysis data. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (number of payout requests) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 is displayed in the next prize ball number area provided in the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. After the end of the predetermined period, the prize balls for the number of the next prize balls requested are continuously paid out. Therefore, in this step, the number of prize balls (the number of payout requests) stored as unanalyzed data in the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 408 is added to the number of next prize ball requests stored in the next prize ball number area. do. Since the value of the prize ball command of this embodiment is 23H (3 ball payout instruction), 2AH (10 ball payout instruction), and 2FH (15 ball payout instruction), the lower 4 bits of the prize ball command in this step. In the case of commands other than 3H, AH, and FH, the command may not be added (excluded).

In the next step S1103, all interrupts including the timer interrupt that activates the payout control unit interrupt process are permitted, and the process ends.

The processing at the time of receiving the prize ball command of Example G will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (b). First, in step S1201, all interrupts including the timer interrupt that activates the payout control unit interrupt process are prohibited.

In the next step S1202, it is determined whether or not the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on. If the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1203, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1204. In this step, if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is off, the received command is ignored. That is, in the command analysis process (step S309) of the main process (FIG. 31) of the payout control unit, an invalid command is eliminated.

In the next step S1203, the number of prize balls is added to the next prize ball number area based on the analysis data. Since this step is the same as that of Example F (step S1102 in FIG. 37 (a)), the description thereof will be omitted. In the next step S1204, all interrupts including the timer interrupt that activates the payout control unit interrupt process are permitted, and the process ends.

<Error management process>
Next, the error management process will be described with reference to FIG. 38. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of error management processing.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the main control communication monitoring timer is 0, and if it is 0 (about 1000 ms in this embodiment) after receiving the main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300. When it has elapsed), the process proceeds to step S1302, and if it is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1303 after setting the main control communication error flag to ON. In step S1303, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to on. That is, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to off when a predetermined period (1000 ms = 100 ms × 10) has elapsed after receiving the main control communication confirmation command. However, not limited to this, when a command indicating that the communication is confirmed is received from the main control unit 300 (that is, after receiving the main control communication confirmation command and before reaching 1000 ms), the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is turned off. It may be set.

In step S1304, the process ends after performing other error management processes. Other error management processes include, for example, a process of determining whether or not various errors have occurred and storing information about the error in an error status storage area provided in the RAM, and a main control unit communication error flag in step S1302. When is set to on, the process of stopping the launching and paying out of the ball by the launching device 110 and the like can be mentioned.

<Transmission command processing (Example H)>
Next, the transmission command process (step S412) in the above-mentioned payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of transmission command processing.

In step S1401, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command reception flag is on or off, and if it is on, the processes of steps S1402 to S1404 are executed, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1402, the payout control communication confirmation command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting the numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register. In step S1403, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to off, and in the next step S1404, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to on.

Originally, after receiving the main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmitting the payout control communication confirmation command to be the response to the main control unit 300, the main control unit 300 sends the payout control unit 600 to the payout control unit 600. A prize ball command is sent. However, before the main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 is received and the payout control unit 600 sends the payout control communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300, the payout control unit 600 receives the prize ball command and receives the prize ball command. It may be written to the receive command buffer. In the present embodiment, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to off before the payout control communication confirmation command is transmitted, and when the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is on, normal processing is performed. Further, even when an illegal command that should not be received is written in the received command buffer, the illegal command is excluded in the command analysis process of the payout control unit main process. As a result, even when an unintended command (illegal command) is received by the payout control unit 600, these commands can be appropriately excluded.

In the next step S1405, the process proceeds to step S1406 after performing other error command set processing. As another error command set process executed in step S1405, for example, it is necessary to send both a communication confirmation command and a command other than the main control communication error command (for example, a command for notifying the occurrence of a payout error). This corresponds to the process of determining whether or not there is a command and, if necessary, sending another command following the communication confirmation command.

In step S1406, it is determined whether the main control communication error flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process of step S1407 is executed, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1408. In step S1407, the main control communication error command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting the numerical value corresponding to the main control communication error command in the transmission data register. In the subsequent step S1408, other transmission command processing is executed, and the processing is terminated.

<Transmission command processing (Example I)>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing another example (Example I) of the transmission command processing of Example G. In step S1501, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command reception flag is on or off, and if it is on, the processes of steps S1504 to S1507 are executed, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1504, the transmission request of the payout control communication confirmation command (10H) is set by setting Bit0 of the 1-byte length transmission command output request information stored in the RAM 708 to 1.

Further, in step S1505, a transmission request for another command is set. Other commands transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 include, for example, a prize ball signal output request command (20H), an error 1 command (30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, 38H), and an error 2 command (40H, 41H). , 42H, 44H, 48H), payout display LED notification command (50H, 51H) and the like.

When transmitting the prize ball signal output request command (20H), the transmission request of the prize ball signal output request command (20H) is set by setting Bit1 of the transmission command output request information, and the error 1 command is set. When transmitting (30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, 38H), by setting Bit2 of the transmission command output request information to 1, the transmission request of the error 1 command (30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, 38H) is performed. To set.

When transmitting the error 2 command (40H, 41H, 42H, 44H, 48H), the error 2 command (40H, 41H, 42H, 44H) can be set by setting Bit3 of the transmission command output request information to 1. When the transmission request of 48H) is set and the payout display LED notification command (50H, 51H) is transmitted, the payout display LED notification command (50H, 51H) is set by setting Bit4 of the transmission command output request information. ) Send request is set.

Further, in step S1506, output information of other commands is set. Here, when notifying the error release state or the end of the prize ball payout operation as error information, 0 is set to Bit0 of the output information of 1 byte length provided in the RAM, the payout number switch error occurs, and the lower tray is full. When notifying that a tan error has occurred or that the prize ball payout operation is in progress, Bit0 of the output information is set to 1. Further, when notifying the occurrence of an illegal payout error or a payout device error, 1 is set in Bit1 of the output information, and when notifying the occurrence of an overpayment error or a main control communication error, Bit2 of the output information is set. When 1 is set and the occurrence of a door opening error or a CR unit unconnected error is notified, 1 is set in Bit 3 of the output information.

In step S1502, it is determined whether the main control communication error flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process of step S1503 is executed, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1503, by setting a numerical value corresponding to the main control communication error command in the transmission data register, the main control communication error command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612, and then the process proceeds to step S1508.

In step S1507, after setting the prize ball command acceptance permission flag to on, the process proceeds to step S1508.

In step S1508, it is determined whether or not the prize ball signal command transmission request setting condition is satisfied, and if it is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1509, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1510. In step S1509, the process proceeds to step S1510 after setting the transmission request of the prize ball signal command. In step S1510, after setting 5 in the transmission command setting counter stored in the RAM 708, the process proceeds to step S1511.

In step S1511, it is determined whether or not the transmission command setting process execution condition is satisfied, and if it is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1512, and if it is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1513. In step S1512, the transmission command setting process is performed. In this transmission command setting process, the least significant bit (Bit0) of the transmission command output request information set in step S1505 is referred to, and if 1 is set, the numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command is set in the transmission data register ( In this example, by setting 10H), a communication confirmation command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612.

Subsequently, after shifting the transmission command output request information by 1 Bit to the right, the lowest Bit (Bit0) is referred to, and if 1 is set, the output information set in step S1506 and the error 1 command are supported. The serial communication line 612 is set by synthesizing the numerical values to be used (30H in this example) and setting the combined numerical values (30H, 31H, 32H, 34H, 38H in this example) in the transmission data register. An error 1 command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the main control unit 300.

Subsequently, after shifting the transmission command output request information by 1 Bit to the right, the lowest Bit (Bit0) is referred to, and if 1 is set, the output information set in step S1506 and the error 2 command are supported. The serial communication line 612 is set by synthesizing the numerical values to be used (40H in this example) and setting the combined numerical values (40H, 41H, 42H, 44H, 48H in this example) in the transmission data register. An error 2 command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the main control unit 300.

Subsequently, after shifting the transmission command output request information by 1 bit to the right, the least significant bit (Bit0) is referred to, and if 1 is set, the output information set in step S1506 and the payout display LED are supported. By synthesizing the numerical value (50H in this example) and setting the combined numerical value (either 50H or 51H in this example) in the transmission data register, the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612. The payout display LED notification command is transmitted to.

In step S1513, after subtracting 1 from the transmission command setting counter, the process proceeds to step S1514. In step S1514, it is determined whether or not the transmission command setting counter is 0. If it is 0, the process ends, and if it is other than 0, the process returns to step S1511 to continue the command transmission process.

<Processing at the time of receiving the main control communication confirmation command (Example J)>
Next, another example of the processing at the time of receiving the main control communication confirmation command of the embodiment E shown in FIG. 36A will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In this example, the timing of turning on the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is different from the flow of FIG. 36 (a). FIG. 3A is a flowchart showing the flow of processing at the time of receiving the main control communication confirmation command.

In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the received main control communication confirmation command is the first main control communication confirmation command received after the payout control unit 600 is activated, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1602, which is not applicable. In the case, the process proceeds to step S1604. In step S1602, after setting the main control communication confirmation command received flag provided in the RAM 708 to on, the process proceeds to step S1603 to execute the activation process (FIG. 36 (b)).

In step S1604, the initial value (500 in this example) is set in the main control communication monitoring timer, and in the next step S1605, the main control communication error flag is set to off. In the next step S1606, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to on, and in the next step S1607, the process ends after the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to on.

<Transmission command processing (Example K)>
Another example (Example K) of the transmission command processing shown in FIG. 39 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In this example, the timing of turning off the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is different from the flow of FIG. 39. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of transmission command processing.

In step S1701, it is determined whether the communication confirmation command reception flag is on or off, and if it is on, the processes of steps S1702 to S1704 are executed, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1702, the communication confirmation command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting the numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register.

In step S1703, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to off, and in the next step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705 after performing other error command set processing. As another error command set process executed in step S1704, for example, both a communication confirmation command and a second command other than the main control communication error command (for example, a command for notifying the occurrence of a payout error) are transmitted. The process of determining whether or not it is necessary and, if necessary, transmitting a second command following the communication confirmation command is applicable.

In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the main control communication error flag is 1 (on or off), and if it is on (1), the process of step S1706 is executed, and if it is off, step S1708 is performed. move on. In step S1706, the main control communication error command is transmitted to the main control unit 300 via the serial communication line 612 by setting the numerical value corresponding to the main control communication error command in the transmission data register.

In the next step S1707, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to off, and in the next step S1708, other transmission command processing is executed to end the processing.

Examples A and B of the received command processing, Examples C and D of the command analysis process, and Example E and Example J of the main control communication confirmation command receiving process and the prize ball command described above. Examples F and G of reception processing and Examples H, I and K of transmission command processing can be appropriately combined as long as there is no problem in control.

For example, Example A (FIG. 33 (a)) is executed as the received command process, Example C (FIG. 34) is executed as the command analysis process, and Example F (FIG. 37 (a)) is executed as the prize ball command reception process. )) Is executed, and Example H (FIG. 39) can be performed as a transmission command process. Alternatively, Example A (FIG. 33 (a)) is executed as the received command process, Example D (FIG. 35) is executed as the command analysis process, and Example G (FIG. 37 (b)) is executed as the prize ball command reception process. )) Is executed, and Example H (FIG. 39) can be performed as a transmission command process.

<Receive command processing, reception command acquisition processing, reception command analysis processing (details)>
The details of the received command process, the received command acquisition process, and the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 50.

43 and 44 are diagrams showing an example of a reception command buffer area provided in the second area 708B of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600.

As shown in FIG. 36, the reception command buffer area is provided as a ring buffer that uses a storage area (buffer) having a fixed length (here, addresses 00H to 03H) in a ring shape and stores data in the buffer. Here, the storage area of addresses 00H to 03H is illustrated as the size of the buffer, but the size of the buffer is not limited to this. In the receive command buffer area, data (value of the receive command) is set and analyzed using a data write pointer (setting pointer) and a data read pointer (analysis pointer) as shown in the figure. When both pointers reach the end of the buffer (here the bottom layer), they are rotated back to the beginning of the buffer (here the top layer). In this way, the data is processed conceptually as if it were a ring, and the data overflows with only the actual area (fixed-length buffer area) and two pointer variables (setting pointer and analysis pointer). It is possible to realize buffer management without any problems.

FIG. 43 is an example in which the value of the setting pointer directly indicates the address of the storage area. First, as shown in FIG. 6A, both the setting pointer and the analysis pointer refer to the position of the start address (00H) of the reception command buffer area. In the ring buffer, the read pointer (analysis pointer) reads data from the position currently referred to, but when the write pointer (setting pointer) and the reference address match, the reading of the data is terminated (waiting). That is, in the state of FIG. 3A, since the positions of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are the same, the CUP of the payout control unit 600 is waiting for reading data.

In this state, when the payout control unit 600 receives the first receive command (for example, 2AH (prize ball command instructing 10 ball payout) from the main control unit 300), the value of the receive command (for example, the value of the receive command (00H) at the position (00H) of the setting pointer) 2AH) is written (Fig. (B)), and the setting pointer moves to the next address (01H) (Fig. 43 (c)). In FIGS. 43 and 44, the value of the received command is a hexadecimal number. The "H" indicating "H" is omitted.

Since the setting pointer and the analysis pointer refer to different addresses, the analysis pointer starts reading data. That is, the analysis pointer refers to the value (2AH in this case) stored at the first address (00H), analyzes the content of the received command from the value, and jumps to the corresponding module (Fig. (C)). .. After the value is read by the analysis pointer, the storage area referenced by the analysis pointer is cleared (Fig. (D)), and the analysis pointer moves to the next address (01H) (Fig. (E)). The data may be read after incrementing the value of the analysis pointer.

Next, when a reception command (for example, a prize ball command instructing the payout of 3 balls) is received, the value (23H) of the reception command is written at the position (01H) of the setting pointer (Fig. (F)) and set. The pointer moves to the next address (02H) (Fig. (G)). When the next reception command (for example, a prize ball command instructing 15 ball payout) is received, the pointer moves to the position of the setting pointer (02H). The value of the receive command (2FH) is written (Fig. (H)), and the setting pointer moves to the next address (03H) (Fig. (I)). The analysis pointer is stored at the current address (01H). Refers to the value (23H in this case), analyzes the content of the received command from the value, jumps to the corresponding module (Fig. (I)), and then clears the storage area referenced by the analysis pointer. (Fig. (J)). When the storage area referenced by the analysis pointer is cleared, the analysis pointer moves to the next address (02H) (Fig. (K)), and (the position of the setting pointer does not match). The buffer value (2FH) is read and analyzed. After that, the storage area referenced by the analysis pointer is cleared (Fig. (L)), and the analysis pointer moves to the next address (03H) (Fig. 3H). (M)).

In the state of FIG. 3M, since the reference addresses of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer match, the analysis pointer waits for data to be read. When the next receive command (for example, 23H) is received, the value (23H) of the receive command is written at the position (03H) of the setting pointer (Fig. (N)), and the setting pointer moves to the next address (00H). (Fig. (O)). The analysis pointer reads the value 23H of the current address 03H and performs analysis (Fig. (O)). The data is written and read in the same manner.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing another example of the received command buffer area. In the example shown in the figure, the position (its value) referred to by the setting pointer and the analysis pointer is different from the address of the storage area where the data is actually stored. That is, the address where the data is stored is calculated based on the position (its value) referred to by the setting pointer and the analysis pointer, and the data is written and read.

With reference to FIG. 44A, an area from addresses 7F10H to 7F13H is secured as a reception command buffer area in which reception commands are stored. On the other hand, the setting pointer is stored in the address 7F0EH of the RAM 708, for example, and the analysis pointer is stored in the address 7F0FH of the RAM 708, for example. ..

That is, in the state of the figure, the value 00H at the beginning of both the setting pointer and the analysis pointer is set, and no data is stored in the reception command buffer area.

In this state, when the payout control unit 600 receives the first reception command (for example, 2AH) from the main control unit 300, a predetermined arithmetic process is performed based on the value (00H) set in the setting pointer, and the reception command is received. The value (7F10H) of the start address of the buffer area is calculated. Then, the reception command (2AH) is stored at the address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area (Fig. (B)). Then, after the reception command is stored, the position of the setting pointer is updated (incremented) and moved to the next address. The analysis pointer performs a predetermined arithmetic process based on the set value (00H), and calculates the value (7F10H) of the start address of the reception command buffer area. Then, the data (2AH) at the address 7F10H in the reception command buffer area is read and analyzed (Fig. (C)). After that, the address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area is cleared (Fig. (D)), the analysis pointer is updated, and the value of the next address is set (Fig. (E)). In this state, when the payout control unit 600 receives the next reception command (for example, 23H) from the main control unit 300, a predetermined arithmetic process is performed based on the value (01H) set in the setting pointer, and the reception command is received. The value (7F11H) of the start address of the buffer area is calculated, and the reception command (23H) is stored in the address 7F11H (Fig. (F)). After that, the setting pointer refers to the next address, the analysis pointer performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the set value (01H), the address 7F11H of the reception command buffer area is calculated, and the stored data ( 23H) is acquired and analyzed. After that, the same process is repeated to store and analyze the data.

The values set in the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are actually 0 to 15 (4 bits), and the values are updated by the increment function. The setting pointer and the analysis pointer are 8 bits, but since the operation result of the logical product of the set value (4 bits 0 to 15) and 0FH is set in the pointer, it should be circulated in the range of 0 to 15. Becomes possible.

<Structure of storage area>
FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b) are schematic views showing a partial configuration of a storage area used in the received command process, the received command acquisition process, and the received command analysis process of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 45 (c) is an example of a command (received command) transmitted by the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600.

FIG. 45A is a schematic view of the status register 772 and the received data register 774, which are a part of the built-in registers of the payout control microcomputer 770. Information indicating the status of the serial communication circuit is stored in the status register 772, and the reception command is stored in the reception data register 774. Although it is shown here as a reception data register 774 that stores a command received by the payout control unit 600, it may be a transmission / reception data register that stores transmission / reception data.

FIG. 45B is a schematic view showing the configuration of the second area 708B of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. As shown in the figure, the second area 708B is composed of, for example, the areas from addresses 7F0EH to 7F13H, the address 7F0EH is the setting pointer storage area 7081, and the address 7F0FH is the analysis pointer storage area 7082. Addresses 7F10H to 7F13H are reception command buffer areas (ring buffers) 708R.

<Receive command processing (details)>
An example of received command processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 46. As described above, the receive command process is a process (see FIG. 33) performed in step S404 of the payout control unit interrupt process (FIG. 32). Further, in the following description, as shown in FIG. 44, a case where the address of the received command buffer area is indirectly calculated and referred to based on the values of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer is shown as an example. That is, in the initial state, the values of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are both 00H, and the area where the data is first stored is the address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area.

First, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 refers to the specific bit of the status register 772 and reads the received data (reception command) from the reception data register 774 when "reception is completed" (1).

As an example, the storage destination of the reception command is obtained based on the value of the setting pointer storage area 7081 and the start address of the reception command buffer area 708R. That is, the start address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area 708R is added to the value (01H) of the setting pointer storage area 7081 (address 7F0EH) to calculate the storage destination address 7F11H (2). The CPU of the payout control unit 600 stores the receive command of the receive data register 774 at the address 7F11H of the receive command buffer area 708R (3). When the receive command is read from the receive data register 774, the specific bit of the status register 772 is cleared. Further, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 updates (increments) the value of the setting pointer (4).

The CPU of the payout control unit 600 may store the receive command of the receive data register 774 in the address 7F11H of the receive command buffer area 708R and clear the specific bit of the status register 772.

<Receive command acquisition process (details)>
An example of the received command acquisition process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 47. The reception command acquisition process is a process performed in step S309 of the payout control unit main process (FIG. 31).

First, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 compares the value of the setting pointer storage area 7081 (here 02H) with the value of the analysis pointer storage area 7082 (here 01H) (1), and these values do not match. If, the analysis is performed. As an example, the storage destination of the data to be analyzed (received command) is obtained based on the value of the analysis pointer storage area 7082 and the start address of the received command buffer area 708R. That is, the value of the analysis pointer (01H in this case) and the start address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area 708R are added to calculate the storage destination address 7F11H (2). The CPU of the payout control unit 600 stores the data stored in the address 7F11H of the receive command buffer area 708R in another area (for example, A register 722 (see FIG. 7)) and addresses the receive command buffer area 708R. Clear the data of 7F11H (3). Further, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 updates (increments) the value of the analysis pointer (4).

After that, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 analyzes the type of the received command (whether it is a prize ball command or a communication confirmation command) stored in the A register 722, and jumps to the corresponding module.

<Received command analysis processing>
An example of the received command analysis process will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. The reception command analysis process is a process performed in step S309 of the payout control unit main process (FIG. 31) (process of step S702 of FIG. 34 or process of step S802 of FIG. 35).

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a relationship between an example of received command data and a jump table. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a bit-wise setting example (contents) of a received command, and FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an example of a jump table.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the received command is 8-bit data, the upper 4 bits indicate the command type, and the lower 4 bits indicate the actual data. For example, when the value of the upper 4 bits is "1", it is the main control communication confirmation command, and when the value of the actual data part of the lower 4 bits is "0", it indicates that it is the initial startup, and the lower 4 bits. When the value of the 4-bit actual data part is "1", it indicates that the return is started. Further, for example, when the value of the upper 4 bits is "2", it is a prize ball command, and when the value of the actual data part of the lower 4 bits is "3", it indicates that 3 balls are paid out. When the value of the actual data part of the lower 4 bits is "10", it indicates that 10 balls are paid out, and when the value of the actual data part of the lower 4 bits is "15", it means that 15 balls are paid out. show. The command type of the upper 4 bits and the actual data of the lower 4 bits are temporarily saved separately, which will be described later.

FIG. 3B shows an example of a jump table. The jump table is provided in the ROM control area of the ROM 706 of the payout control unit 600, and the lower 8 bits (or the upper 8 bits) of the start address 0750H of the main control communication confirmation command reception process (program) are set at the address 0700H. The upper 8 bits (or lower 8 bits) of the start address (here, 0750H) of the main control communication confirmation command reception process are stored in the 0701H. Further, the lower 8 bits (or upper 8 bits) of the start address (here, 0780H) of the processing (program) at the time of receiving the prize ball number command is stored in the address 0702H, and the lower 8 bits (or the upper 8 bits) are stored in the address 0703H when the prize ball number command is received. The upper 8 bits (or lower 8 bits) of the processing start address 0780H are stored.

The CPU of the payout control unit 600 analyzes the upper 4 bits of the prize ball command, and in the case of "1", refers to the address 0700H of the jump table in the figure (b), and processes when the main control communication confirmation command is received. Jump to the start address (0750H in this case). Further, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 analyzes the upper 4 bits of the prize ball command, and in the case of "2", refers to the address 0702H of the jump table in the figure (b) and processes when the prize ball number command is received. Jumps to the start address of (here, 0780H).

49 and 50 are views showing details of the received command analysis process, and are diagrams showing an analysis example of the received command stored in the A register in FIG. 47 (3).

FIG. 49A shows a case where “00100011” is stored in the A register as, for example, a prize ball command (23H) for instructing the payout of three balls. First, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 saves the value of the A register in the B register in order to determine the command type later. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is turned off in step S1403 of FIG. 33B, the process is terminated without storing the received command in the buffer. When the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is turned off in step S706 of FIG. 34, the process ends without performing the prize ball command reception processing. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (a) (after the prize ball command is stored in the buffer), it is analyzed that the prize ball command is a prize ball command by referring to the upper 4 bits, and the prize ball command cannot be accepted (prize ball command). If the acceptance permission flag is off), the command may be discarded and the process may be terminated. Further, even if a command other than the main control communication confirmation command and the prize ball command is discarded, or an unintended prize ball command is discarded by turning off the prize ball command acceptance permission flag, the main control unit 300 is notified. It is not necessary to send that it is an error.

Next, as shown in FIG. 6B, the logical product of the A register value “00100011” and 0FH (“000001111”) is calculated in order to acquire the value of the lower 4 bits of the A register and stored in the A register. Store. As a result, the upper 4 bits of the value of the A register are masked and only the value of the actual data portion becomes (“000000111”).

Next, as shown in the figure (c), the value (actual data part) of the A register is saved in the C register, and then, as shown in the figure (d), the value of the B register is used for determining the command type. The value "00100011" is stored (returned) in the A register. The order of the comparison processing of the actual data part and the return processing for determining the command type may be reversed.

Next, as shown in the figure (e), in order to acquire the value of the upper 4 bits of the A register, the logical product of the A register value "00100011" and F0H ("11110,000") is calculated and stored in the A register. Store. As a result, the lower 4 bits of the value of the A register are masked, and only the value indicating the command type (“00100000”) is obtained.

Subsequently, in FIG. 43 (a), the value of the A register is shifted to the right four times. As a result, the value of the A register becomes "00000010" in the case of the prize ball command as shown in the figure (in the case of the main control communication confirmation command, it becomes "00000001").

In the figure (b), the value of the A register is subtracted (decremented) to obtain "00000001" in order to calculate the offset. Then, as shown in FIG. 6C, the decremented value of the A register is compared with a specific value (here, for example, 02H) (CP 02H instruction). At this timing, the value of the A register (after decrementing) is usually 00H or 01H, so if a carry occurs, it is a normal command, and if a carry does not occur, it is an unintended command. Can be judged. Therefore, if carry does not occur, the process is terminated as an unintended command. The comparison with a specific value may be performed before the subtraction process.

Next, in FIG. 4D, the start address 0700H of the jump table shown in FIG. 48B is stored in the HL register (pair register) 724 of the payout control unit 600.

Next, as shown in the figure (e), the value "000000010" which is double the value of the A register in the figure (b) is added to the value of the HL register and stored in the added HL register. Jump to the address you are in (move to the module). The jump to the address stored in the HL register is performed by, for example, a "JP (HL) instruction". In this example, the jump is made to the address 0780H stored in the address 0702H of the jump table, and the processing at the time of receiving the prize ball number command is executed.

Further, although not shown, when the reception command is the main control communication confirmation command, the value of the A register in FIG. 6B is "00000000000". That is, in the figure (e), the double value of the A register value added to the HL register is also "00000000000", and the jump is made to the address 0750H stored in the address 0700H of the jump table, and the main control communication confirmation command is used. Receiving processing is executed.

If the process shifts to the process when the prize ball number command is received after FIG. 49 (e), the actual data portion saved in the C register in FIG. 49 (c) becomes the prize ball number. In step S1102 of FIG. 37 (a) or step S1203 of FIG. 37 (b), a process of adding to the next prize ball number area is performed. Although no fraudulent countermeasures have been taken for the number of prize balls, as a countermeasure against fraudulent numbers of prize balls, a process of referring to the actual data portion (lower 4 bits) saved in the C register may be performed.

Although the reception command processing, the reception command acquisition processing, and the reception command analysis processing have been described above, the transmission command processing (step S412 in FIG. 32) and the transmission command output processing (step S311 in FIG. 31) are the above-mentioned reception command processing. , At least one or more of the received command acquisition process and the received command analysis process may be executed in the same manner.

Although the main control communication confirmation command is periodically transmitted to the payout control unit 600, it may be transmitted only before the prize ball command is transmitted. In that case, only the first main control communication confirmation command is transmitted to the prize ball. It may be sent separately from the command. Further, for example, one main control communication confirmation command may be transmitted for each prize ball command transmission. Further, one transmission may be performed for each interrupt of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, or a plurality of transmissions may be performed for each interrupt, a group unit may be transmitted for each interrupt, and a plurality of transmissions may be performed for each interrupt within a range not exceeding 255. ..

In addition, when sending and receiving a prize ball command when a prize ball is generated, if information about the state of the device or the like is transmitted and received, the amount of communication increases too much, so that the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 periodically When sending and receiving a communication confirmation command to, the payout control unit 600 may send and receive information on the state of the device and the like at the timing of sending and receiving the communication confirmation command.

Further, when the main control communication confirmation command is not received, the command related to the error may not be transmitted to the main control unit 300. In this case, some errors may be transmitted by using an error command, such as transmitting an error of a predetermined type.

Further, when the main control communication confirmation command is received, a plurality of types of commands may be transmitted to the main control unit 300 at different timings (for example, different main processes). For example, when a plurality of types of commands are transmitted at the same time, for example, the upper 4 bits of the error command may be sent in ascending order, or the upper 4 bits may be sent in ascending order.

Further, since the prize ball command is an important command related to the prize ball, the command may be encrypted.

Further, the flow of each process described in the above embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the figure as long as the same function can be obtained, and the process order can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the receive command process (step S404) may be executed in the payout control unit main process of FIG. 31, and the command analysis process (step S309) may be executed in the payout control unit interrupt process of FIG. 32. The receive command process (step S404) and the command analysis process (step S309) may be executed in the payout control unit main process, or the receive command process (step S404) and command analysis may be executed in the payout control unit interrupt process of FIG. The process (step S309) may be executed.

In the prize ball command reception processing shown in FIG. 37 (b), the prize ball command acceptance permission flag determination process (FIG. 33 (b)) of the reception command process (step S404) in the payout control unit interrupt process (FIG. 32). ) In step S1403), even if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is off, if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag in this step is on, the process proceeds to the next step S1203. That is, even if the payout control unit interrupt processing determines that the command is invalid, it may be processed as a normal reception command in this step.

As described above, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has a winning means (for example, a normal drawing start port 228, a first special figure start port 230, a second special figure start port 232, and variable. A gaming table including a winning opening 234), a first control means (for example, a main control unit 300), and a second control means (for example, a payout control unit 600), wherein the first control The means is a means capable of at least executing game control, and the second control means is a means capable of at least executing a control for giving a prize (hereinafter, referred to as "prize giving control"), and the second control means. The control means is at least electrically connected to the first control means via a communication line (for example, serial communication line 612), and the first control means is a first process (for example, serial communication line 612). For example, it is a means capable of at least executing the special figure 1 related lottery process, the special figure 2 related lottery process, etc. shown in FIG. 11, and the first control means is a second process (for example, the communication shown in FIG. 19). It is a means that can at least execute a process of detecting an abnormality by an abnormality monitoring process and a process of setting an abnormality in a register by the encrypted communication control unit 315 shown in FIG. 8), and the first process is a process related to the winning means. Yes, the second process is a process capable of detecting at least the first abnormality, and the first control means has a first period (for example, even when the first abnormality is detected). , The period indicated by the reference numeral Wt1 in FIG. 20A), the first processing can be started at least, and the first abnormality is an abnormality related to communication with the second control means (for example, It is a game console characterized by (communication timeout).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if a communication abnormality occurs between the control units during the game, it is possible to continue the processing related to the winning means until the first period elapses, and the communication abnormality In some cases, it is possible to avoid a situation that causes a disadvantage to the player.

The "process related to the winning means" according to the present invention is a process of referring to the state of the detection signal output from the winning means (a process of referring to the off / on of the detection signal), and the state is updated according to the reference result. Processing (processing to refer to whether or not the on / off pattern of the detection signal is a predetermined pattern (for example, on-on-off)), processing to update the state related to the prize ball according to the updated state (process) It includes at least one, a plurality, or all of information for outputting various signals to the external terminal board, processing for updating information regarding setting of control commands for the second control means, and the like). Further, the "processing related to the winning means" may be executed intermittently by the interrupt processing a plurality of times.

Further, the first control means is a means capable of starting the execution of the first process even after the elapse of the first period when the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition. May be a condition that may be satisfied when the first abnormality is resolved within the first period.

Further, the first control means is a means for shifting to a winning invalid state when the second condition is satisfied, and the second condition is the first in the first period. It may be a condition that may be satisfied when one abnormality is not resolved. The second condition may be a condition (a condition that is 100% satisfied) that is always satisfied when the first abnormality is not resolved during the first period. Further, the winning invalid state may at least include not executing the first process.

Further, the first control means is a means capable of at least executing the third process, and the third process is a process capable of at least detecting a second abnormality (for example, a specific abnormality shown in FIG. 18). The first control means is a means that does not execute the first process when the second abnormality is detected, and the second abnormality is an abnormality different from the first abnormality. There may be.

Further, the first control means is a means capable of at least executing a fourth process, and the fourth process is a random number update (for example, a basic random number initial value update process shown in FIG. 10, FIG. 13 shows. The basic random number update process shown in FIG. 13 and the effect random number update process shown in FIG. 13) can be executed at least, and the first control means can detect the first abnormality even when the first abnormality is detected. The process may be at least a viable means. The random number may be only a software random number or only a hardware random number.

Further, the first control means is a means capable of at least executing the game control according to the first control program, and the second control means is the prize-giving control according to the second control program. The first control program is a program including at least a main process (for example, a main control main process), and the first control program is an interrupt process (for example, a main control). It is a program including at least a unit timer interrupt process), and the first process may be at least a process that can be executed in the interrupt process.

Further, the first control means may be a means capable of starting the execution of the first process a plurality of times in the first period even when the first abnormality is detected. Further, the first abnormality may be an abnormality caused by a timeout of communication with the second control means.

Further, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment includes a first control means (for example, a main control unit 300) and a second control means (for example, a payout control unit 600). The second control means is a means capable of at least communicating with the first control means, and the first control means is a means capable of at least executing the first process. The first control means is a means capable of at least executing the second process, and the first process is a process capable of at least executing game control (for example, the special figure 1 related lottery process shown in FIG. 11). The second process is a process capable of detecting at least the first abnormality (for example, the communication abnormality monitoring process shown in FIG. 19, and the encrypted communication control unit 315 shown in FIG. 8). The first control means extends over the first period (for example, the period indicated by the reference numeral Wt1 in FIG. 20A) even when the first abnormality is detected. The first process is at least a means capable of executing the first process, and the first abnormality may be an abnormality related to communication with the second control means (for example, a communication timeout).

Further, the first control means is a means capable of continuing the first process even after the elapse of the first period when the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is the first condition. It may be a condition that may be satisfied when the first abnormality is resolved in the first period.

Further, the first control means is a means capable of at least executing the third process, and the third process is a process capable of at least detecting a second abnormality (for example, a specific abnormality shown in FIG. 18). The first control means is a means that does not execute the first process when the second abnormality is detected, and the second abnormality is different from the first abnormality. It may be abnormal.

Further, the first control means is a means capable of at least executing a fourth process, and the fourth process is a process capable of at least executing a random number update (for example, a basic random number initial value shown in FIG. 10). The update process, the basic random number update process shown in FIG. 13, and the effect random number update process shown in FIG. 13), and the first control means has the fourth abnormality even when the first abnormality is detected. The process may be at least a viable means.

Further, a winning means (for example, a normal drawing starting port 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting port 232, and a variable winning opening 234) is provided, and the first process is a process related to the winning means. There may be. Further, the first control means is a means capable of at least executing the game control according to the first control program, and the second control means gives a prize according to the second control program. The first control program is at least a means capable of executing control, the first control program is a program including at least a main process (for example, a main control unit main process), and the first control program is an interrupt process (for example, a main control unit main process). The program includes at least the main control unit timer interrupt process), and the first process may be at least executable in the interrupt process.

Further, the second process described above may be executed without depending on the first control program. Further, the first abnormality may be an abnormality caused by a timeout of communication with the second control means. Further, the second control means may be a means capable of communicating with the first control means via a serial communication line (for example, a serial communication line 612).

<Embodiment 2>
Hereinafter, the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
In addition, in order to avoid duplicate explanations, in principle, only the configuration different from the game console according to the first embodiment will be described. In principle, FIGS. 51 to 98 are used only for the description of the second embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the second embodiment is shown in FIGS. 51 to 98. The code shown in 98 has priority.

<Communication between control boards>
First, communication between the control boards of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51A is a block diagram showing an example of connection between control boards. The launch unit 940 shown in the figure is a unit including the launch handle 134 and the launch device 844 described above.

The launch control board 174 is connected to the launch handle 134 of the launch unit 940 via the handle relay board 848 and the glass frame relay board 842. On the launch control board 174 from the launch handle 134, a launch intensity adjustment signal input from the launch volume 804b, a touch switch signal input from the touch switch 804d, a launch stop switch signal input from the launch stop switch 804f, and a launch stop switch signal. A firing intensity changeover switch signal or the like input from the turbo switch 804h is input. Further, the launch control board 174 is also connected to the launch device 844 of the launch unit 940, and a launch solenoid signal or the like is output from the launch control board 174 to the launch device 844.

Further, the launch control board 174 is also connected to the payout control board 170, a launch permission signal or the like is output from the payout control board 170 to the launch control board 174, and the launch control board 174 to the payout control board 170. , Touch switch signal, firing intensity status signal, etc. are output.

The payout control board 170 is connected to the main control board 156 via a serial communication line via the inner frame relay board 824, and the payout control board 170 and the main control board 156 are capable of bidirectional serial communication. The main control board 156 is also connected to the first sub control board 160, but the main control board 156 and the first sub control board 160 are unidirectional from the main control board 156 to the first sub control board 160. Only communication is possible.

The touch switch signal, the firing intensity status signal, etc. acquired by the payout control board 170 can be output from the payout control board 170 to the main control board 156 by serial communication, and these signals are further output from the main control board 156. It is possible to output to the first sub-control unit 160 by one-way communication. The touch switch signal, the firing intensity state signal, and the like acquired by the payout control board 170 may not be output from the payout control board 170 to the main control board 156 and the first sub-control unit 160.

<Communication between control boards / Modification example>
FIG. 51 (b) is a block diagram showing another example of connection between control boards. In this example, the launch control board 174 and the main control board 156 are directly connected without going through the payout control board 170, and the launch control board 174 to the main control board 156 are connected to the launch intensity adjustment signal and the touch switch. It is configured to be able to output signals, launch stop switch signals, launch intensity selector switch signals, etc.

The main control unit 300 may be able to receive signals related to firing on both the first path and the second path. Further, the first route may be serial communication with the payout control board 170, and the second route may be directly input from the launch control board 174. Further, the signal related to the launch may be a launch intensity state signal for both the first path and the second path, or may be a launch intensity changeover switch signal for both the first path and the second path. However, one may be a firing intensity status signal and the other may be a firing intensity selector switch signal.

According to this example, even if the main control board 156 cannot acquire various signals output by the launch unit 940 from the payout control board 170 due to some trouble in the payout control board 170, the launch control is performed instead. Various signals can be acquired from the board 174, and stable game control may be possible.

Further, FIG. 51 (c) is a block diagram showing another example of connection between control boards. In this example, the launch control board 174 and the first sub-control board 160 are directly connected to each other from the launch control board 174 to the first sub-control board 160 without going through the payout control board 170 and the main control board 156. It is configured to be able to output a launch intensity adjustment signal, a touch switch signal, a launch stop switch signal, a launch intensity changeover switch signal, and the like.

According to this example, even if the main control board 170 cannot acquire various signals output by the launch unit 940 from the payout control board 174 due to some trouble in the payout control board 170, the first control board 170 is instead. The sub-control board 160 can acquire various signals from the launch control board 174, and may be able to perform stable game control.

The first sub-control unit 400 may be able to receive signals related to firing in both the first path and the second path. Further, the first route may be a command from the main control unit 300, and the second route may be directly input from the launch control unit 630. Further, the command from the main control unit 300 may be a command based on serial communication with the payout control unit 600, or may be a direct input from the launch control unit 630 different from the second route. Further, the signal related to the launch may be a launch intensity state signal for both the first path and the second path, or may be a launch intensity changeover switch signal for both the first path and the second path. However, one may be a firing intensity status signal and the other may be a firing intensity selector switch signal.

Further, FIG. 52A is a block diagram showing another example of connection between control boards. In this example, the launch unit 940 and the launch control board 174 are connected by a plurality of communication lines (for example, parallel signal lines), and the launch intensity adjustment signal, the touch switch signal, and the launch stop switch are connected via each communication line. It is configured so that signals, firing intensity changeover switch signals, firing solenoid signals, etc. can be input and output individually.

Further, in this example, one-way communication is performed between the launch control board 174 and the payout control board 170, and a launch permission signal or the like can be output from the launch control board 174 to the payout control board 170. Further, in this example, the main control board 156 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 942 are connected to the payout control board 170, and the main control board 156 is also connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 942. Similarly, the launch intensity adjustment signal, the touch switch signal, the launch stop switch signal, the launch intensity changeover switch signal, and the like can be output.

Further, FIG. 52B is a block diagram showing another example of connection between control boards. In this example, in addition to the launch unit 940 and the launch control board 174, the launch unit 940 and the payout control board 170 are also connected by a plurality of communication lines, and the launch intensity adjustment signal, the touch switch signal, the launch stop switch signal, and the launch The strength changeover switch signal, the firing solenoid signal, and the like can be output directly from the firing unit 940 to the payout control board 170.

According to this example, even if the payout control board 170 cannot acquire various signals output by the launch unit 940 from the launch control board 174 due to some trouble in the launch control board 174, the launch unit instead. Various signals can be directly acquired from the 940, and stable game control may be possible.

In the case of a configuration in which the touch switch signal and the launch stop switch signal are directly output from the launch unit 940 to the payout control board 170, the launch permission signal can be output to the launch control board 174 after taking these signals into consideration. In some cases, the circuit configuration of the launch control board 174 can be simplified.

<Overview of microcomputer for payout control>
Next, the payout control microcomputer 770 mounted on the payout control board 170 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53A illustrates the main terminals included in the payout control microcomputer 770.

The payout control microcomputer (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) 770 has two parallel output ports POP0 and POP1, two parallel input ports PIP0 and PIP1, and data signal input / output terminals D0 to D7. , And are configured. The parallel output port POP0 can output serial communication transmission signals to chip select output terminals PO00 / XCS0, PO01 / XCS1, PO02 / XCS2, PO03 / XCS3, PO04 / XCS4, PO05 / XCSE that can output chip select signals. It is composed of various output terminals PO06 / TX. Further, the parallel output port POP1 is composed of general-purpose output terminals PO10 to PO16.

Further, the parallel input port PIP0 is composed of general-purpose input terminals PI00 to PI07, and the parallel input port PIP1 includes a general-purpose input terminal PI10, an input terminal PI11 / XINT that can also be used as an external interrupt input terminal, and a non-maskable interrupt. It is composed of an input terminal PI12 / XNMI that can also be used as an input terminal and an input terminal PI13 / RX that can input a reception signal of serial communication. The terminal indicated by "/" indicates that the terminal is also a function-combined terminal, and the function can be selected by setting a value in the program management area of the built-in ROM. For example, the PO01 / XCS1 terminal is a terminal that can select either the output port or the chip select output to an external device.

FIG. 53B is a diagram (partial excerpt) showing the connection between the payout control microcomputer 770 and the external device (IC). In this example, the data signal output terminals D0 to D7 of the payout control microcomputer 770 are connected to the three IC1, IC2, and IC3, respectively, and the chip select output terminals PO00 / XCS0 are connected to the IC1 having eight input / output terminals. Connected, the chip select output terminals PO01 / XCS1 are connected to the IC2 having eight input / output terminals, and the chip select output terminals PO02 / XCS2 are connected to the IC3 having eight input / output terminals.

In this example, when 8-bit data is input from IC1, IC1 is selected by outputting a low-level signal to the chip select output terminals PO00 / XCS0, and then from the data signal input / output terminals D0 to D7. Enter the data. When outputting 8-bit data to IC2, select IC2 by outputting a low-level signal to the chip select output terminals PO01 / XCS1 and then output data from the data signal input / output terminals D0 to D7. Output. When outputting 8-bit data to the IC3, select the IC3 by outputting a low-level signal to the chip select output terminals PO02 / XCS2, and then output the data from the data signal input / output terminals D0 to D7. Output.

In this example, the case where the chip select input of IC1 to IC3 is low active is shown, but when the chip select input of IC1 to IC3 is high active, the chip select output terminals PO00 / XCS0, PO01 / The logic of the signals output from XCS1 and PO02 / XCS2 may be inverted.

<Main command>
Next, the main command transmitted from the main control unit 300 (main control board 156) to the first sub control unit 400 (first sub control board 160) will be described with reference to FIG. 54. Note that FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the main command.

The main command of this example consists of 16-bit length data, and is classified into an 8-bit length upper command and an 8-bit length lower command. Bits 6 to 4 of the upper command are fixed data representing a group of main commands. For example, the main command is a group of commands related to the game state such as a power-on command, a special figure holding ball number command, and a device command. being classified. Bits 3 to 0 of the upper command are data for identifying commands in the same group. Note that bit 7 (most significant bit) of the above command is an area in which the STB (most significant bit) value is stored, and when the STB (strobe information) value is on, the main command is set. Shown.

Bits 7 to 0 of the lower command are variable data representing parameters (number, type, state, number of times, various flags, etc.) of each command. For example, the lower command of the special figure hold number command 1 stores a numerical value indicating the number of special figure 1 hold balls as a parameter of the command, and the lower command of the device command 1-1 is a parameter of the command. The payout control communication abnormality detection status, board switch level abnormality detection status, external clock abnormality detection status, impact, magnetic abnormality detection status, and magnetic field abnormality detection status are stored.

Further, for example, the special figure fluctuation stop command is a command to be transmitted when the special figure fluctuation is stopped, and the launch position command is a command to be transmitted after the fixed wait time (for example, 600 ms) has elapsed after the special figure is stopped. be. The main control unit 300 changes the gaming state after the lapse of the fixed wait time. For example, the electric support ends at the relevant timing, and the right-handed indicator lamp 224 is also turned off at the relevant timing. The parameters of the other commands are as shown in the figure.

<External terminal board signal>
Next, the external terminal board signal to be output to the outside via the above-mentioned external terminal board 609 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a connection example of the main board 156, the payout board 170, the external terminal board 609, and the external device (hall computer) 670, and FIG. 56 (a) is a diagram showing an external output from the main board 156. FIG. 56B is a diagram showing an example of a terminal board signal, and FIG. 56B is a diagram showing an example of an external terminal board signal output from the payout board 170.

<External terminal board signals 3 to 10>
The main board 156 is configured to be capable of outputting eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 shown in FIG. 56 (a). The external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) is a signal that outputs a voltage of a predetermined level (for example, high level) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on or an abnormality is detected. Here, "when the power is turned on", which is the output start condition of the security information signal, is after the low voltage signal input to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 of the main control unit 300 is turned off (main control from the power control unit 660). When the start-up time of the first sub-control unit 400 elapses (after the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the unit 300 reaches a predetermined value (9 V)), the sub-control unit starts up, which is counted by the main control unit 300. (When the wait counter becomes 0) is given as an example.

In addition, "at the time of abnormality detection", which is the output start condition of the security information signal, is an error related to winning (for example, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field) among the errors monitored by the device monitoring process of the main control unit timer interrupt processing described later. An example is the case where an abnormality related to a switch (for example, a switch level abnormality error or a switch disconnection error) is detected.

The external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) is a signal indicating the number of game balls to be paid out (details will be described later), and the external terminal board signals 5 to 8 (big hit information 1 to 4 signals) vary. It is a signal which shows the information about the hit / fail judgment result of a game, and the external terminal board signal 4 (starting port information signal) is a signal which shows the information about the starting port (the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232). The external terminal board signal 3 (symbol confirmation number information signal) is a signal indicating information regarding symbol variation of a normal figure or a special figure.

As shown in FIG. 55, the eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 output from the output terminals (or input / output terminals) of the main board 156 are the external device 670 via the payout board 170 and the external terminal board 609. It is input to the information input circuit 350 provided in (for example, a hall computer). As a result, the external device 670 can acquire various information contained in the main board 157. In this example, an example in which the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 are output from the output terminals (or input / output terminals) of the main board 156 is shown, but the information corresponding to the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 is described above. It may be output as a control command from the main board 156 to the payout board 170 via the output interface.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56A, the main control unit 300 provides a storage area for external output signal information having a length of 1 byte in the RAM 308, and Bits 0 to Bit7 of the external output signal information have external terminals. Information corresponding to the board signals 3 to 10 is assigned to each. For example, when the value of the external output signal information is 10000000B (B is a binary number), the security information corresponding to the external terminal board signal 10 is 1, the symbol confirmation number information corresponding to the other external terminal board signals 3 to 9, and the start. It shows that the oral information, the jackpot information 1 to 4, and the payout schedule information are 0.

<External terminal board signals 1, 2>
The payout board 170 is configured to be able to output eight types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2, a CR gaming machine READY signal, a CR gaming machine rental completion signal, and a payout error LED 1 to 4 signal shown in FIG. 56B. .. The external terminal board signal 1 (payout signal) is a signal indicating the number of game balls paid out (number of completed payouts) (details will be described later), and the external terminal board signal 2 (door opening signal) is the opening of the front frame door 106. The CR game machine READY signal is a signal indicating a state, the CR game machine READY signal is a signal indicating whether or not a game is possible, and the CR game machine rental completion signal is an XS signal described later, and the payout error LEDs 1 to 4 are used. The signal is a signal indicating a lighting / extinguishing state of the payout notification LED, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 55, the two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the payout board 170 are transmitted to the external device 670 (for example, a hole) via the external terminal board 609. It is input to the information input circuit 350 provided in the computer). As a result, the external device 670 can acquire various information contained in the payout board 170.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56B, the payout control unit 600 provides a storage area for external output signal information having a length of 1 byte in the RAM, and Bits 0 to Bit7 of the external output signal information have external terminals. Information corresponding to the board signals 1 and 2, the CR game machine READY signal, the CR game machine lending completion signal, and the payout error LEDs 1 to 4 signals is assigned, respectively. For example, when the value of the external output signal information is 00000001B (B is a binary number), the payout information corresponding to the external terminal board signal 1 is 1, the door opening information corresponding to the other external terminal board signal 2, the CR game machine READY. It is shown that the information corresponding to the signal, the information corresponding to the CR game machine rental completion signal, and the information corresponding to the payout error LEDs 1 to 4 signals are 0.

<Other connection examples of external terminal board signals>
Next, another connection example of the external terminal board signal will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57A is a connection example in which the arrangement of the main board and the payout board is reversed with respect to the connection example shown in FIG. 55. In this example, the two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the payout board 170 are information provided in the external device 670 via the main board 156 and the external terminal board 609. It is input to the input circuit 350. Further, the eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the main board 156 are transmitted to the external device 670 via the external terminal board 609 (without going through the payout board 170). Is input to the information input circuit 350 provided in.

With such a configuration, even if some abnormality occurs in the payout board 170, it is possible to output eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 from the main board 156 to the external device 670 without going through the payout board 170. Is. Therefore, for example, even if the external terminal board signal 1 (payout information signal) cannot be output to the external device 670 due to an abnormality in the payout board 170, if the main board 156 is operating normally, the main board 156 The external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) can be output to the external device 670, and information regarding the number of game media payouts can be reliably transmitted to the external device 670.

Further, FIG. 57B is a connection example in which both the main board 156 and the payout board 170 are directly connected to the external terminal board 609. In this example, the two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the payout board 170 are externally transmitted via the external terminal board 609 (without passing through the main board 156). It is input to the information input circuit 350 included in the device 670. Further, the eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 output from the output terminal (or input / output terminal) of the main board 156 are transmitted to the external device 670 via the external terminal board 609 (without going through the payout board 170). Is input to the information input circuit 350 provided in.

With such a configuration, even if some abnormality occurs in the payout board 170, it is possible to output eight types of external terminal board signals 3 to 10 from the main board 156 to the external device 670 without going through the payout board 170. In addition, even if some abnormality occurs in the main board 156, it is possible to output two types of external terminal board signals 1 and 2 from the payout board 170 to the external device 670 without passing through the main board 156.

Therefore, for example, even if the external terminal board signal 1 (payout information signal) cannot be output to the external device 670 due to an abnormality in the payout board 170, if the main board 156 is operating normally, the main board 156 The external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) can be output to the external device 670, and the external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) can be output to the external device 670 due to an abnormality in the main board 156. If the payout board 170 is operating normally, the external terminal board signal 1 (payout information signal) can be output from the payout board 170 to the external device 670, and information on the number of game media payouts can be output. Can be reliably transmitted to the external device 670.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the main control unit timer interrupt. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

The WDT314 may be cleared and restarted not by the timer interrupt process but at the beginning of the loop process in the main process (for example, before the execution of step S121).

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full tank sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I / O 310. It is input to monitor the presence or absence of a detection signal, and is stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 4 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is judged that there was a passage of. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226 and 234 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next to determine whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information. Further, when the emission intensity state signal or the emission intensity changeover switch signal is input without going through the payout control means, the input / output may be detected in the process of step S205.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set.

For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the general figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In step S212, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function limitation counter is 0, and if the interrupt function limitation counter is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S213. On the other hand, when the interrupt function limitation counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S214. In step S213, the interrupt function limitation counter is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S239 without performing the processes of steps S215 to S235.

In step S214, it is determined whether or not the specific abnormality detection flag (details will be described later) is ON, and if the specific abnormality detection flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S239 without performing the processes of steps S215 to S235. On the other hand, if the specific abnormality detection flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S215.

In step S215, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for counting, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing / stopping the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time , Update various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S216, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228, the winning ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. Details will be described later, but in this prize acceptance process, whether or not there was a prize in the general prize opening 226, the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the normal figure start port 228, and the variable prize opening 234. When a prize is won, the corresponding number of prize balls is stored in the prize ball number storage area provided for each of the winning opening and the starting opening in the RAM 308. In step S219, serial command management processing is performed. Details will be described later, but in this serial command management process, serial communication with the payout control unit 600 is managed.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (a variable game of the normal map).

Further, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display the out-of-line symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs definite display of either the hit symbol (normal symbol A) or the missed symbol (general symbol B). After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. do. Further, if the result of the normal-figure variable game is out of order, the non-normal-figure flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this out-of-normal flag is on, even in the normal-figure state update process at the end of the predetermined stop display period described above (the timing when the value of the normal-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random value is then acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

In step S224, the special figure look-ahead control process is performed. In this special figure look-ahead control process, look-ahead of the special figure winning random number value and the like is performed. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a general drawing Probability fluctuation flags Each flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation. When the flag is on, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, 2R jackpot When the flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on. The special figure D and 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E and 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the normal When the figure probability fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, and the first missed flag are on. In the case of, the lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is performed so that the special figure I and the special figure I are in the respective modes when the second off flag is on. , The setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability change symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time saving symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation symbol (special symbol E), sudden normal symbol (special symbol F), first small hit symbol (special symbol G), second small hit symbol (special symbol H), first missed symbol (special symbol) Confirmation display of any one of I) and the second outlier symbol (special symbol J) is performed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, a symbol indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the variation display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, the player waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, the door member 234a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are won in the variable winning opening 234. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the closing period is stored in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process which repeats the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the effect waiting period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving number of times 100 times is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot is shortened. When this time saving flag is set to on, it is in a high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, there is a higher possibility of hitting the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special-figure variable game are shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state. Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because, if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of games are played in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, and many games are played in the second special drawing starting port 232 until the game ball enters. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases due to the ball entering the ball and the gambling property increases. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the output request information area which is a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is different, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure start port 232. However, the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special figure start port 230 is notified with priority.

In step S232, the device monitoring process is executed. Details will be described later, but in this device monitoring process, processing for detecting the presence or absence of errors in various devices is performed.

In step S233, the command setting transmission process is performed. Specifically, the output request information area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not a command output request to the first sub-control unit 400 has occurred. When a command output request is generated, the corresponding main command is set in the transmission information storage area. For example, when the main command is the special figure reserved ball number command 1, the information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number is acquired from a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and a lower command indicating the information (for example, when the reserved ball number is 3). Sets "00000011") and a higher-level command indicating that the special figure reserved ball number command 1 is set in the transmission information storage area.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the upper command included in the received main command enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and the information of the lower command included in the main command. Based on the above, it becomes possible to determine the detailed production control content.

In step S234, the display display setting process is performed. In this display display setting process, the above-mentioned various status display units 328 (normal figure hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high-accuracy middle lamp 222, round lamp 223, and states. The indicator lamp (right-handed indicator lamp) 224) is turned on / off.

In step S235, the external output signal setting process is performed. Details will be described later, but in this external output signal setting process, processing such as outputting external terminal board signals 3 to 10 toward the payout board 170 is performed. As described above, the external terminal board signals 3 to 10 may be configured to be output to the external terminal board 609 without passing through the payout board 170.

In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and then the process returns to the main control unit main process. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit described above.

<External output signal setting process>
Next, the external output signal setting process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the external output signal setting process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

In step S301, the external output signal information is based on each information corresponding to the above-mentioned external output signal information (excluding the payout schedule information, symbol confirmation count information, start port information, jackpot information 1 to 4, and security information). Update the value. For example, when the security information is 1 and the other information is 0, the value of the external output signal information is updated to 10000000B.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the number of output requests is 1 or more, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S303, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S303, 1 is set in Bit 6 (payout schedule information) of the external output signal information. For example, in the previous example, the value of the external output signal information is updated from 10000000B to 11000000B. Further, in step S304, 1 is subtracted from the number of output requests, and the process proceeds to step S305.

In step S305, it is determined whether the specific abnormality detection flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S306, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S307. In step S306, mask processing of external output information provided in RAM 308 is performed.

FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining an example of mask processing of external output signal information in step S306. In this example, when the value of the external output signal information before mask processing is 11000001B, that is, the security information, the payout schedule information, and the symbol confirmation count information are 1, the other jackpot informations 1 to 4, and the start port information are 0. Is shown. Further, it is shown that the value of the mask information used for the mask processing is 10000000B.

Here, the "mask information" is information having the same 1-byte length as the external output signal information, and Bits 0 to Bit7 of the mask information correspond to Bits 0 to Bit7 of the external output signal information, respectively. In the mask processing in step S306, by calculating the logical product (AND) of this mask information and the external output signal information, a part of the external output signal information can be forcibly set to 0 (mask). There is.

The main control unit 300 sets the mask information to 11111111B (initial value) in the initial setting, but when it is determined in step S305 of the external output signal setting process that the specific abnormality detection flag is on (when there is specific abnormality information), the main control unit 300 sets the mask information. , Any one of Bits 0 to 7 of the mask information is updated from 1 to 0. In the present embodiment, when a magnetic anomaly error or a magnetic field anomaly error occurs, the mask information is set to 10000000B by updating Bits 0 to 6 of the mask information from 1 to 0 as shown in FIG. , Bits 0 to 6 of the external output signal information are forcibly set to 0 (mask) by mask processing.

As a result, when 1 is set in any of Bits 0 to 6 of the external output signal information, that is, 1 is set in any of the symbol confirmation count information, the start port information, the jackpot information 1 to 4, and the payout schedule information. Even if it is set, all the information is masked (set) to 0, and a low-level signal is output from the signal corresponding to each information.

Returning to FIG. 59, in step S307, for example, a process of outputting external terminal board signals 3 to 10 toward the payout board 170 is performed based on the external output signal information. Specifically, when Bit0 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first-level signal (for example, a high-level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 3 (symbol confirmation number information signal). It outputs only a predetermined period (for example, a period of 500 ms), and outputs a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) when 0 is set.

Similarly, when Bit 1 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 4 (starting port information signal) for a predetermined period (for example, a high level signal). For example, it outputs only for a period of 500 ms), and when 0 is set, it outputs a second level signal (for example, a low level signal). When Bit 2 of the external output signal information is set to 1, the first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 5 (big hit information 1 signal) for a predetermined period (for example). , 500 ms period), and if 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 3 of the external output signal information is set to 1, the first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 6 (big hit information 2 signal) for a predetermined period (for example). , 500 ms period), and if 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

When Bit 4 of the external output signal information is set to 1, the first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 7 (big hit information 3 signal) for a predetermined period (for example). , 500 ms period), and if 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 5 of the external output signal information is set to 1, the first level signal (for example, a high level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 8 (big hit information 4 signal) for a predetermined period (for example). , 500 ms period), and if 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output.

When Bit 6 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first-level signal (for example, a high-level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 9 (payout schedule information signal) for a predetermined period (for example). , 500 ms period), and if 0 is set, a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) is output. When Bit 7 of the external output signal information is set to 1, a first-level signal (for example, a high-level signal) is used as the external terminal board signal 10 (security information signal) for a predetermined period (for example, for example). It outputs only for a period of 500 ms), and outputs a second level signal (for example, a low level signal) when 0 is set. The "predetermined period (output time of each signal)" in this example is not limited to a period of 500 ms, and may be a period of less than 500 ms or a period of more than 500 ms.

<Modification example 1 of external output signal setting processing>
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a modification 1 of the external output signal setting process. In the external output signal setting process according to the first modification, the processes of steps S305, S401, and S402 are applied instead of the processes of steps S305 to S306 of the external output signal setting process shown in FIG. 64.

Specifically, in step S305, it is determined whether the specific abnormality detection flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S401 to perform the first mask processing of the external output signal, and if it is off, the step Proceeding to S402, the second mask processing of the external output signal is performed. In the first mask processing, the same processing as the mask processing in step S306 is performed, but in the second mask processing, mask information different from the mask information (first mask information) used in the first mask processing (first mask information). Mask processing is performed using the second mask information). Here, in this embodiment, the first mask information is provided in the storage area of the RAM 308 to enable rewriting of the contents, while the second mask information is provided in the storage area of the ROM 306 to rewrite the contents. It is impossible.

For example, in the first mask processing, the mask information is changed from the initial value of 11111111B to 10000000B by updating Bits 0 to 6 of the mask information from 1 to 0, and the external output signal information Bits 0 to 6 are changed by the mask processing. Forcibly set to 0 (mask). On the other hand, in the second mask processing, the initial value 11111111B is used as it is as the mask information, and Bits 0 to 7 of the external output signal information are not forcibly set (masked) to 0 by the mask processing.

With such a configuration, mask processing can be used properly according to the conditions (for example, depending on the presence or absence of a specific abnormality), and an external signal suitable for the conditions may be output.

<Modification 2 of external output signal setting processing>
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a modification 2 of the external output signal setting process. In the external output signal setting process according to the second modification, the order of the processes in step S305 of the external output signal setting process shown in FIG. 59 and the processes in steps S302 to S304 are changed.

Specifically, in step S305, it is determined whether the specific abnormality detection flag is on or off, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S306 to perform mask processing, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S302 and subsequent processes. It is configured in.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the external signal from being output (or to delay the external signal) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, when there is a specific abnormality. May be able to prevent the external signal from being output (or delay the external signal). Therefore, it may be possible to output an external signal at an appropriate timing.

<Payout control microcomputer>
Next, the payout control microcomputer 770 mounted on the payout control board 170 will be described in detail.

<Payout control microcomputer / terminal arrangement>
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of the terminal arrangement of the payout control microcomputer 770. As described above, the payout control microcomputer 770 includes two parallel input ports PIP0 and PIP1. In this example, the terminal arrangement of the parallel input port PIP0 is the terminal arrangement shown in FIG. The terminal arrangement of the parallel input port PIP1 is the terminal arrangement shown in FIG. For example, in the case of FIG. 3A, for example, the terminal corresponding to the payout number switch signal of Bit0 is the PI00 terminal, and the terminal corresponding to the payout switch operation confirmation signal of Bit2 is the PI02 terminal. The same applies to the following. Further, the payout control microcomputer 770 includes two parallel output ports POP0 and POP1. In this example, the terminal arrangement of the parallel output port POP0 is set to the terminal arrangement shown in FIG. The terminal arrangement of the POP1 is set to the terminal arrangement shown in FIG.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 770 is connected to IC1 to IC3, the figure (e) corresponds to IC1, the figure (f) corresponds to IC1, and the figure (g) shows. Corresponds to IC3.

<Details of payout control microcomputer / terminal arrangement / LED control>
FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing the data configuration of the output port 1 register for outputting the data of the parallel output port POP1, and FIG. 64 (b) is an output pattern when outputting via the 7SEG decoder. It is a figure which showed. Further, FIG. 64 (c) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the output terminals POP10 to POP16 and each segment of the LED.

In this example, the output terminals POP10 to POP16 of the parallel output port POP1 are connected to each segment of the 7-segment LED, and the 7-segment LED is connected via the output port 1 register for outputting the data of the parallel output port POP1. Controls the lighting / extinguishing of.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the output port 1 register of this example can select whether or not to control the LED via the built-in 7SEG decoding by setting the bit 7 (7DEN). When the bit 7 (7DEN) is set to 1, the ON / OFF of each of the output terminals POP10 to POP16 is individually controlled to control the lighting / extinguishing of each segment of the LED. The correspondence between the output terminals POP10 to POP16 and each segment of the LED is as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the bit 7 (7DEN) is set to 0, the output pattern shown in the figure (b) is output to the 7SEG decoder from the output terminals POP10 to POP16 (bits 6 to 0 of the output port 1 register). As a result, the lighting / extinguishing control of the LED is performed via the 7SEG decoding.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the relationship between the error name, the LED display (LED lighting pattern), the state of the error display LED, and the state of the payout display LED. In this example, for example, when an error has not occurred, the LED is used to display the number 0, and the error display LED and the payout LED are turned off. On the other hand, when an error occurs, the numbers 1 to 8 are displayed using LEDs according to the type of error, and the error display LED and the payout LED are turned on or off according to the display pattern shown in the figure. Take control.

The error display LED and the payout LED may be provided on the payout control board 170, or may be provided on the game board or the game frame that the player can see, or one of them may be provided on the payout control board. The 170 may be provided and the other may be provided on the game board or the game frame. Further, a plurality of error display LEDs may be provided, the first error display LED may be provided on the payout control board 170, and the second error display LED may be provided on the game board or the game frame.

<Payout control microcomputer / timer>
FIG. 66A is a diagram showing an example of a timer used by the payout control microcomputer 770. The payout control microcomputer 770 stores a plurality of timers (software timers) shown in FIG. 6A in the RAM 708, and these timers are periodically updated in the timer update process of the payout control unit interrupt process described later ( It is configured to count up or down). The numerical value described in the item of "timer value (ms)" indicates the time measured by each timer. For example, the CR unit connection signal monitoring timer is used to measure 2 seconds (= 2000 ms). Indicates that the timer is set.

<Payout control microcomputer / signal state storage unit>
FIG. 66B is a diagram showing a part of the storage area of the RAM 708 of the payout control microcomputer 770. The payout control microcomputer 770 is provided with a signal state storage area for storing various states shown in FIG. 6B in a part of the storage area of the RAM 708 (in this example, the range of addresses F051h to F056h).

<Payout control microcomputer / detectable error>
Next, an error that can be detected by the payout control microcomputer 770 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67A is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control microcomputer 770, and FIG. 67B is a diagram showing the conditions for generating the door opening error, that is, the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error. It is a figure which showed the combination.

As described above, since the main control unit 300 can output the errors of various devices detected in the device monitoring process (step S232) to the payout control unit 600, the payout control microcomputer 770 is the same as the main control unit 300. , Lower tray full tank error (lower tray full tank error), payout device error, payout excess error, illegal payout error, payout quantity switch error, main control communication error, CR unit unconnected error, CR unit communication error, magnetic error, external It is possible to detect clock error, magnetic field error, switch level error, frame opening error (front frame door opening error), switch disconnection error, impact sensor error, and so on. In addition to these errors, the payout control microcomputer 770 can also detect a main control communication error when the communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 cannot be received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example). ..

<Payout control microcomputer / Payout control command>
Next, a payout control command transmitted from the payout control unit 600 (payout control board 170) to the main control unit 300 (main control board 156) will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. Note that FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a payout control command, and FIG. 69 is an example (a) of transmission command output request information used when executing a transmission command process described later and a part of the payout control command. It is a figure (b to e) which showed the data structure of.

The commands received by the payout control unit 600 from the main control unit 300 include a communication confirmation command (sometimes referred to as a "main control communication confirmation command") and a prize ball number command (sometimes referred to as a "prize ball command"). be. These received commands are analyzed by the command analysis process (step S309) of the payout control unit main process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to each command is executed.

The main control communication confirmation command is a command indicating the communication status between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 and the activation method (initial activation or return activation) of the main control unit 300. The prize ball command is a command indicating the payout of game balls for the number of designated prize balls.

The commands transmitted by the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 include a communication confirmation return command, a prize ball signal output request command, device commands 1 to 4, and a prize ball payout operation state command. These transmission commands are transmitted to the main control unit 300 in the transmission command process (step S311) of the payout control unit main process described later. The main control unit 300 analyzes these commands in the command analysis process (step S159) of the above-mentioned main control unit timer interrupt process, and executes the process corresponding to each command.

The communication confirmation return command (sometimes referred to as a "communication confirmation command") is a command indicating that a communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300 has been received. The prize ball signal output request command is a command for instructing the output of the prize ball signal to the test firing test signal terminal. Device commands 1 to 4 are commands indicating various states of the device, and their data configurations are as shown in FIG. 69. The prize ball payout operation state command is a command indicating the operation state of the prize ball payout.

In this example, the above-mentioned emission intensity state signal (turbo switch signal) information is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 (set to bit 1) to the main control unit 300 as the device command 4, and is the above-mentioned touch switch signal. The information is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 (set to bit 0) to the main control unit 300 as the device command 4. In this example, the firing intensity status signal and the touch switch signal are configured to be transmitted by the same device command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be transmitted by another device command. Further, the firing intensity status signal and the like (including the touch switch signal) may be configured to be transmittable by the same device command as other signals, and may be configured to be transmitted by a device command different from a predetermined signal (for example, CR unit unconnected error). It is possible to appropriately combine device commands 1 to 4 with various states, such as configuring the device so that it can be transmitted with. Further, the types of device commands are not limited to 1 to 4.

<Payout control unit / Payout control unit interrupt processing>
Next, the payout control unit interrupt process executed by the payout control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout control unit interrupt processing. The payout control unit 600 includes a counter timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once in 1 ms in the present embodiment), and the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed in a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Start.

In step S401, the register value is saved, in step S402, the interrupt flag is cleared, and in step S403, the WDT is cleared and restarted. Further, in step S404, the reception command is processed. In this process, it is determined whether or not a command is received from the main control unit 300 (for example, reception of a prize ball command), and if it is received, the received command data is set in the reception command buffer area.

In step S405, it is determined whether or not the main control communication confirmation command has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S406, and if not, the process proceeds to step S414. As described above, since the main control unit 300 receives the power supply from the payout control unit 600, its activation is delayed from that of the payout control unit 600. Therefore, in this step, a determination process is performed in order to wait for the subsequent processes of steps S406 to S413 until the main control unit 300 is activated.

In step S406, port input processing is performed. In this port input process, the value of the I / O port is acquired to detect the status of various sensors. Specifically, the state of various signals input from the card unit 608 via the interface unit 606, the state of the ball payout signal input from the payout sensor 604, the signal input from the lower plate sensor, the state of the signal input from the error release switch, etc. Is acquired and stored in the input signal information storage area provided in the RAM. Further, when the firing intensity state signal input from the firing control board 174 is a signal indicating an on state, the turbo state notification lamp 151 is turned on, and when the firing intensity state signal is a signal indicating an off state, the turbo state notification lamp is used. Control is performed to turn off 151.

In step S407, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the main control communication monitoring timer, the lending request waiting timer and the lending instruction waiting timer provided in the RAM, the on / off time of the payout notification LED, the motor drive / non-drive time, etc. are measured. Update various timers including timers.

In step S408, device monitoring processing is performed. Details will be described later, but in this device monitoring process, whether or not there is an abnormality in communication with the main control unit 300 is monitored, and whether or not various errors have occurred is determined, and the error occurrence status is determined. The LED is turned off / on.

In step S409, CR unit communication processing is performed. In this CR unit communication process, communication with the card unit 608 is performed based on the states of various signals input from the card unit 608 via the interface unit 606. For example, when a game ball lending request signal is received from the card unit 608, the number of lending requests included in the lending request signal is added to the payout number information of the lending number storage unit, which will be described later.

In step S410, the payout management process is performed. In this payout management process, the payout device 552 is controlled. In step S411, signal output processing is performed. In this signal output processing, the signal to be output to the outside from the external terminal board (not shown) is controlled.

In step S412, the transmission command setting process is performed. In this transmission command setting process, various commands to be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 are set. These various commands also include commands related to errors. In this specification, "error" is referred to as "error" in this specification such as payout quantity switch error, illegal payout error, payout excess error, lower plate full tank error, payout error, main control communication error, door open error, etc. Includes everything you have done. In step S413, port output processing is performed. Details will be described later, but in this port output process, a process of outputting a launch permission signal to the launch control board 174 is performed.

In step S414, the register value is restored, and in step S415, the process ends after the interrupt enable setting is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the process of storing the received command in the RAM 708 (buffer) is performed by the receive command process (step S404) of the payout control unit interrupt process, and the process of analyzing the command is the payout control unit main process. This is performed in the command analysis process (step S309) of.

<Device monitoring process>
Next, the device monitoring process (step S408) in the above-mentioned payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 71. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing.

In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the main control communication monitoring timer is 0, and if it is 0 (about 1000 ms in this embodiment) after receiving the main control communication confirmation command from the main control unit 300. When it has elapsed), the process proceeds to step S1302, and if it is other than 0, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1303 after setting the main control communication error flag to ON. In step S1303, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to on. That is, the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is set to off when a predetermined period (1000 ms = 100 ms × 10) has elapsed after receiving the main control communication confirmation command. However, not limited to this, when a command indicating that the communication is confirmed is received from the main control unit 300 (that is, after receiving the main control communication confirmation command and before reaching 1000 ms), the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is turned off. It may be set.

When the main control unit 300 detects a specific abnormality (magnetic error), the main control unit 300 does not execute the serial command management process in step S219 as described above, so that the payout control unit 600 is in main control communication. You will not be able to send confirmation commands. As a result, the payout control unit 600 causes a main control communication error, and the game ball shifts to a state in which it cannot be launched. Here, in this example, since it takes about 1000 ms from the detection of the specific abnormality by the main control unit 300 to the occurrence of the main control communication error by the payout control unit 600, the game ball is played even after the specific abnormality is detected. Is configured to be capable of firing at least one ball. However, without limiting this, for example, when the main control unit 300 detects a specific abnormality, a command indicating that the specific abnormality is detected is transmitted to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 immediately permits firing. It may be configured to turn off the signal.

In step S1304, other device state update processing is performed. In step S1305, the display display setting process is performed. In this display display setting process, LED lighting / extinguishing / lighting control is performed based on the device state updated in step S1305. Here, for example, when the pachinko machine 100 is in an error state, an LED (for example, an LED arranged on the upper part of the pachinko machine 100) for notifying the player that an error has occurred is lit. When the error is resolved, the LED is turned off. For example, when the overpayment error flag provided in the RAM 708 is set, the LED for notifying the player that an overpayment error has occurred is turned on, and the overpayment error flag is cleared. If so, the LED is turned off. Further, when the lower plate full tank error flag provided in the RAM 708 is set, the LED for notifying the player that the lower plate full tank error has occurred is turned on, and the lower plate full tank error is turned on. When the flag is cleared, the LED is turned off.

In step S1306, the process ends after the other device monitoring process is performed. Other device monitoring processes include, for example, a process of stopping the launching and paying out of a ball by the launching device 844 when the main control unit communication error flag is set to ON in step S1302.

<Port output processing>
Next, the port output process (step S413) in the above-mentioned payout control unit interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 72. Note that FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the flow of port output processing.

In step S2301, the emission permission signal bit is cleared, and in the next step S2302, it is determined whether or not a main control unit communication error has occurred. If so, the process proceeds to step S2305 and the error has not occurred. In the case, the process proceeds to step S2303. In step S2303, it is determined whether or not a CR unit non-connection error has occurred, and if it has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2305, and if it has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S2304. That is, the process proceeds to step S2304 only when it is not a main control unit communication error and a CR unit non-connection error.

In step S2304, the emission permission signal bit is set. As a result, the launch permission signal is output from the payout control board 170 toward the launch control board 174. In step S2305, the processing ends after performing other port output processing.

<Transmission timing of launch intensity state (device command 4 including launch intensity state)>
Next, the transmission timing of the above-mentioned device command 4 (command including the firing intensity state) will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. Note that FIG. 73A is a time chart showing an example of transmission timing from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 when the firing intensity state signal is on, and FIG. 73B is a firing intensity. It is a time chart which showed an example of the transmission timing from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300 when the state signal is off. Further, FIG. 74 is a time chart showing an example of transmission timing from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400.

The times T1 to T7 shown in FIG. 73 indicate the elapsed time from the timing when the firing intensity state signal is switched from on to off (or off to on), and the times T1 and T5 are times less than 100 ms (for example, for example). 80 ms), time T2, T6 indicates a time of 100 ms or more longer than T1, T5 (for example, 120 ms), and time T3, T7 indicates a time longer than T2, T6 (for example, 180 ms).

As described above, in this example, the payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit the information of the emission intensity state signal to the main control unit 300 by setting the bit 1 of the device command 4. However, since the timing after the lapse of time T1 and the lapse of T5 after the firing intensity status signal is switched from off to on (or from on to off) is less than 100 ms (see FIG. 63), after the lapse of time T1 and after the lapse of T5. At the timing of, the firing intensity state of the device command 4 is configured to be off.

Further, at the timing after the lapse of time T2 and after the lapse of T6 after the firing intensity status signal is switched from off to on (or from on to off), although it exceeds 100 ms, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the main control unit 300. Since the timing for transmitting the confirmation command has not arrived, the device command 4 itself is not transmitted at the timing after the lapse of the time T2 and the lapse of T6.

Then, after the lapse of time T3 and after the lapse of T7 after the firing intensity status signal is switched from off to on (or from on to off), the timing exceeds 100 ms, and the payout control unit 600 confirms communication with the main control unit 300. Since it is the timing to transmit the command, the device command 4 in which the firing intensity state is on is transmitted at the timing after the lapse of time T3 and after the lapse of T7.

Further, in this example, the main control unit 300 transmits the information of the emission intensity state signal received from the payout control unit 600 to the first sub control unit 400 as a control command. As shown in FIG. 117, the emission intensity is transmitted. It is configured to transmit only when the status signal changes from off to on (or from on to off). However, not only when the command is changed, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 at each timing when the main control unit 300 transmits the command to the first sub-control unit 400 or immediately after receiving the command from the payout control unit 600. It may be configured to transmit at each timing.

Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 processes the command from the main control unit 300 (analyzes the received command and executes a predetermined process) at a timing of once every 33 ms, the firing intensity state signal is turned on / off. The determination is delayed by about 33 ms at the maximum as compared with the main control unit 300, and various processes performed based on the firing intensity status signal (for example, display based on the firing intensity status signal) are delayed by at least the time. (Note that, as described above, the time after operating the turbo button 870 g is delayed by 33 ms or more because each control unit delays the time).

<Communication example 1 between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600>
Next, a communication example 1 of the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 75. It should be noted that the figure is a diagram showing a timing chart of communication example 1 of the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 and an example of changes in variables at a predetermined timing.

The main control unit 300 subtracts 1 from the communication confirmation command transmission timer in the serial command transmission process of the N (N is a positive integer) th time of the main control unit timer interrupt processing, and the communication confirmation command transmission timer becomes 0. At the timing when the communication confirmation command is sent, the initial value of 25 (a numerical value corresponding to a time of about 100 ms) is set in the communication confirmation command transmission timer, and the serial command status is 1 (a numerical value indicating that the prize ball command cannot be transmitted). To set. Further, at the same timing, by setting the numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register, the communication confirmation command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612, and then 1 from the communication confirmation command transmission counter. Is subtracted, for example, when the value of the communication confirmation command transmission counter is 10, it is updated to 9.

On the other hand, when the payout control unit 600 receives the main control communication confirmation command in the command analysis process, the payout control unit 600 executes the process at the time of receiving the main control communication confirmation command. Then, in this processing when the main control communication confirmation command is received, the initial value of 1000 (a numerical value corresponding to a time of about 1000 ms) is set in the main control communication monitoring timer, the main control communication error flag is set to off, and communication confirmation is performed. Set the command reception flag to on.

Subsequently, the payout control unit 600 determines in step S1001 of the transmission command process that the communication confirmation command reception flag is on. Therefore, the payout control unit 600 sets a numerical value corresponding to the communication confirmation command in the transmission data register for serial communication. After transmitting the communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 via the line 612, the communication confirmation command reception flag is set to off.

Further, since the main control unit 300 determines that the communication confirmation command has been received from the payout control unit 600 in the serial command reception process of the N + 1th main control unit timer interrupt process, the serial command status is the initial value. Set 0 (a numerical value indicating that the prize ball command can be transmitted), set the communication confirmation command transmission counter to 10 which is the initial value, and set the serial command communication error flag to 0. Further, in the N + 1th serial command transmission process of the main control unit interrupt process, the value of the communication confirmation command transmission timer is updated from 25 to 24 by subtracting 1 from the communication confirmation command transmission timer.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the prize ball command transmission condition is satisfied in the prize ball command setting process of the main control unit timer interrupt processing after the N + second time, and if it is satisfied, the prize is awarded. By setting the numerical value corresponding to the ball command in the transmission data register, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 via the serial communication line 612.

<Example of prize ball command transmission timing>
For example, in the period shown in t1 of the figure, after the main control unit 300 receives the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 in the N + 1th main control unit timer interrupt process and the serial command status becomes 0 ( Since the prize ball command transmission condition was satisfied once (after the prize ball command can be transmitted), the prize ball command is issued to the payout control unit 600 in the N + 3rd main control unit timer interrupt process. It has been sent once.

Further, in the period shown in t2 of the figure, after receiving the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 in the N + 1th main control unit timer interrupt processing and the serial command status becomes 0 (the prize ball command can be transmitted). Since the prize ball command transmission condition was satisfied twice, the prize ball command was issued once to the payout control unit 600 in the N + 2nd and N + 3rd main control unit timer interrupt processing. , Sending.

Further, in the period shown in t3 of the figure, the main control unit 300 receives the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 in the N + 1th main control unit timer interrupt process, and before the serial command status becomes 0 ( Since the prize ball command transmission condition was satisfied once (before the prize ball command can be transmitted), the transmission of the prize ball command is temporarily suspended. Then, in the N + 1th main control unit timer interrupt process, the communication confirmation command is received from the payout control unit 600 (waiting for the prize ball command to be ready to be transmitted), and the N + 1th main control unit is used. In the control unit timer interrupt process, the prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600.

FIG. 76A is an enlarged view of the time chart when the prize ball command is transmitted. In this example, the ball enters the start port or the winning opening at the timing indicated by the reference numeral A, and then enters the starting opening or the winning opening at the timing indicated by the reference numeral B of the Nth main control unit timer interrupt process. Detecting a sphere. Further, the prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600 at the timing indicated by the reference numeral C of the same Nth main control unit timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, FIG. 76B is an enlarged view of the time chart for the period shown in t3 of FIG. 75. In this example, the ball enters the start port or the winning opening at the timing indicated by the reference numeral A, and then enters the starting opening or the winning opening at the timing indicated by the reference numeral B of the Nth main control unit timer interrupt process. Detecting a sphere. Further, at the timing indicated by the symbol F of the same Nth main control unit timer interrupt process, it is determined that the ball entry pattern to the start port or the winning port matches the predetermined winning determination pattern information. In the example, since the timing for transmitting the communication confirmation command has arrived at the same time, the communication confirmation command is transmitted with priority over the prize ball command at the timing indicated by the symbol F (the transmission of the prize ball command is temporarily suspended). ing).

On the other hand, the payout control unit 600 transmits a communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 at the timing indicated by the symbol H of the M + 1 (M is a positive integer) third payout control unit main process. Further, the main control unit 300 confirms the reception of the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 at the timing indicated by the symbol C of the N + 1th main control unit timer interrupt process, and then holds the payout control unit 600. The prize ball command that was being sent is sent once.

Returning to FIG. 75, in the period shown in t4 of the figure, the main control unit 300 satisfied the prize ball command transmission condition twice before the Nth main control unit timer interrupt process, so that the Nth time. In the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, the prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600, but immediately after that, the timing to send the communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600 has arrived. Since, the serial command status is set to 1 (the prize ball command cannot be sent). Therefore, the transmission of the prize ball command is temporarily suspended, and the communication confirmation command is received from the payout control unit 600 in the N + 2nd main control unit timer interrupt processing (a state in which the prize ball command can be transmitted). In the N + second main control unit timer interrupt process, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control unit 600 once.

<Example of serial communication error>
In the period shown in t6 of the figure, the main control unit 300 sends a communication confirmation command to the payout control unit 600 in the Nth main control unit timer interrupt process, and then the Nth and subsequent main control unit timer interrupt processes. Since the response of the payout control unit 600 to the communication confirmation command has not been received in, the serial command status is held at 1.

After that, the main control unit 300 waits for the response of the payout control unit 600 to the communication confirmation command until the value of the communication confirmation command transmission counter changes from 10 to 0, and when there is still no response, as shown in t8 of the figure. , Change the serial communication error flag from 0 to 1. If there is a response from the payout control unit 600 after that, the serial communication error flag is changed from 1 to 0 and serial communication is restarted as shown in t9 of the figure.

<When multiple winnings at the starting port or winning opening are detected>
FIG. 77A is an example of a time chart when a plurality of winnings of the starting port or the winning opening are detected in one main control unit timer interrupt process. In this example, the ball enters the start port or the winning port at the timings indicated by the symbols A and I, respectively, and then starts at the timings indicated by the symbols B and J of the Nth main control unit timer interrupt process. Detecting a ball entering the mouth or winning opening. Further, at the timing indicated by the symbol C of the same Nth main control unit timer interrupt processing, a prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600, and then the N + 1th main control unit timer interrupt processing is performed. At the timing indicated by the reference numeral K, the prize ball command is transmitted once to the payout control unit 600.

<Modification example of communication confirmation command from payout control unit 600>
FIG. 77B is a time chart showing a modified example of the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600. In this example, the ball enters the start port or the winning opening at the timing indicated by the reference numeral A, and then enters the starting opening or the winning opening at the timing indicated by the reference numeral B of the Nth main control unit timer interrupt process. Detecting a sphere. Further, at the timing indicated by the symbol F of the same Nth main control unit timer interrupt process, it is determined that the ball entry pattern to the start port or the winning port matches the predetermined winning determination pattern information. In the example, since the timing for transmitting the communication confirmation command has arrived at the same time, the communication confirmation command is transmitted with priority over the prize ball command at the timing indicated by the symbol F (the transmission of the prize ball command is temporarily suspended). ing).

On the other hand, the payout control unit 600 transmits a communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 at the timing indicated by the symbol H of the M + 1 (M is a positive integer) third payout control unit main process. Further, the main control unit 300 confirms the reception of the communication confirmation command from the payout control unit 600 at the timing indicated by the symbol C of the N + 1th main control unit timer interrupt process, and then gives a prize ball to the payout control unit 600. The command is being sent once. Further, in response to this prize ball command, the payout control unit 600 transmits a communication confirmation command to the main control unit 300 at the timing indicated by the symbol M of the M + 3rd payout control unit main process.

<Example of output of external terminal board signal>
Next, an output example of the external terminal board signal will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 85. The "prize ball" in the drawing indicates the timing of winning detection by the main control unit 300 and the number of prize balls (number of payout requests), and the "payout" indicates the timing of payout of the game ball by the payout control unit 600. Shows the number of payouts. Further, the "payout schedule information signal" indicates the waveform of the payout schedule information signal (external terminal board signal 9) output by the main control unit 300, and the "payout information signal" is output by the payout control unit 600. The waveform of the payout information signal (external terminal board signal 1) is shown.

<External terminal board signal output example 1>
FIG. 78 is a time chart showing an output example 1 of an external terminal board signal. In this example, since the main control unit 300 detects the winning of the first special figure starting port 230, the number of prize balls corresponding to the first special drawing starting port 230 in the winning opening counter update process (step S216). In addition to storing 3 as the number of prize balls in the storage area, in the serial command management process (step S219), a prize ball command including information on the number of payout requests (= number of prize balls 3) is transmitted to the payout control unit 600.

Further, the main control unit 300 determines in the serial command management process (step S219) whether or not the total number of prize balls is 10 or more, and if applicable, subtracts 10 from the total number of prize balls. , 1 is added to the number of output requests, but here, since the total number of prize balls is 3, the process of adding 1 to the number of output requests is not performed. Further, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more, but here, since the number of output requests is 0. , The process of outputting the payout schedule information signal is not performed.

Subsequently, the payout control unit 600 pays out the number of payout requests (3 in this example) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 in the prize ball command reception processing (step S503) of the command analysis process. Payouts for payouts are added to the payout number information (initial value 0 in this example) of the payout number storage unit and the payout number information (initial value 0 in this example) of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout. The payout number information of the number storage unit is updated to 3, and the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is updated to 3. Further, in the payout management process (step S710), the payout control unit 600 drives the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 to pay out the game ball based on the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for payout. , The payout number information of the payout number storage unit for payout is subtracted by the payout number, but here, since the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for payout is 3, after paying out three game balls, The payout number information of the payout number storage unit for payout is updated to 0 (= 3-3).

Subsequently, in the signal output process (step S711), the payout control unit 600 is external when the value of the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) or more. The process for outputting the payout information signal to the information input circuit 350 via the terminal plate 609 is performed. Here, since the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is 3, the payout information signal is output. No processing is performed for output.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 detects the winning of the variable winning opening 234, and in the winning opening counter update process (step S216), the number of winning balls is stored in the prize ball number storage area corresponding to the variable winning opening 234. 15 is stored, and in the serial command management process (step S219), a prize ball command including information on the number of payout requests (= number of prize balls 15) is transmitted to the payout control unit 600. Further, the main control unit 300 determines in the serial command management process (step S219) whether or not the total number of prize balls is 10 or more, and if applicable, subtracts 10 from the total number of prize balls. , Add 1 to the number of output requests. In this example, since the total number of prize balls is 15 and the predetermined number is 10 or more, the total number of prize balls is updated to 5 by subtracting the predetermined number 10 from the total number of prize balls 15, and the output request number is updated to 1. , Update the number of output requests to 1.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more in the external output signal setting process (step S235). In this example, the number of output requests is 1. Therefore, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), a high-level signal is output for a predetermined period of time as the first payout schedule information signal.

Subsequently, the payout control unit 600 pays out the number of payout requests (15 in this example) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 in the prize ball command reception processing (step S503) of the command analysis process. The payout number information of the payout number storage unit (0 in this example) and the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout (3 in this example) are added to each, and the payout number information of the payout number storage unit is added. , And the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is updated to 18. Further, the payout control unit 600 drives the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the payout management process (step S710) and the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for payout, and then pays out the game ball. The payout number information of the payout number storage unit is subtracted by the payout number, but here, since the payout number information of the payout number storage unit is 15, the payout is made after 15 game balls are paid out. The payout number information of the payout number storage unit is updated to 0 (= 15-15).

Further, in the signal output process (step S711), the payout control unit 600 is an external terminal when the value of the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) or more. The process for outputting the payout information signal to the information input circuit 350 via the board 609 is performed. Here, since the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is 18, the value of the payout number information. Is output once at the timing when it is determined that is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment). In this example, a high-level signal is output as the payout information signal over the period Tb.

Here, the high-level period Ta of the payout information signal output by the main control unit 300 and the high-level period Tb of the payout information signal output by the payout control unit 600 are not particularly limited, but in this example, the period. Ta is set longer than the period Tb (the shortest period is 800 ms). With such a configuration, the external device may be able to easily distinguish between the payout schedule information signal and the payout information signal depending on the difference in pulse width.

<External terminal board signal output example 2>
FIG. 79 is a time chart showing an output example 2 of the external terminal board signal. As described above, in the serial command management process (step S219), the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the total number of prize balls is 10 or more, and if applicable, 10 is calculated from the total number of prize balls. Subtract and add 1 to the number of output requests. In this example, since the total number of prize balls is 24 and the predetermined number is 10 or more, the total number of prize balls is updated to 14 by subtracting the predetermined number 10 from the total number of prize balls 24, and the output request number is updated to 1. After that, since the total number of prize balls after subtraction is 14 and the predetermined number is 10 or more, the predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the total number of prize balls 14 again to update the total number of prize balls to 4, and the output request number is set to 2. It has been updated to.

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more in the external output signal setting process (step S235). In this example, the number of output requests is 2. Therefore, in the external output signal setting process, after the high level signal is output for a predetermined period as the first payout schedule information signal, the low level signal is once used for the period in the subsequent external output signal setting process. It is output over Tc, and in the subsequent external output signal setting process, a high-level signal is output over a predetermined period as the second payout schedule information signal.

Subsequently, the payout control unit 600 pays out the number of payout requests (15 in this example) included in the prize ball command received from the main control unit 300 in the prize ball command reception processing (step S503) of the command analysis process. The payout number information of the payout number storage unit (0 in this example) and the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout (9 in this example) are added to each, and the payout number information of the payout number storage unit is added. , And the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is updated to 24. Further, in the payout management process (step S710), the payout control unit 600 drives the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 to pay out the game ball based on the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for payout. , The payout number information of the payout number storage unit is subtracted by the payout number, but here, since the payout number information of the payout number storage unit is 15, after paying out 15 game balls, The payout number information of the payout number storage unit for payout is updated to 0 (= 15-15).

Further, in the signal output process (step S711), the payout control unit 600 sets the external terminal plate when the value of the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is a predetermined number (10 in this example) or more. The process for outputting the payout information signal to the information input circuit 350 via the 609 is performed. Here, since the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is 24, which is a predetermined number of 10 or more, the payout is performed. The information signal is output once, the predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the payout number information 24 of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout, and the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is updated to 14. There is. Further, since the payout control unit 600 has a payout number information of 14 and a predetermined number of 10 or more in the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout after subtraction, the payout information signal is output once again and is external at the time of payout. A predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the payout number information 14 of the output number storage unit, and the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is updated to 4. In this example, as the first payout information signal, a high-level signal is output for a predetermined period, then a low-level signal is output for a period of Td, and then a second payout information signal is output. As a result, a high-level signal is output over a predetermined period.

In this example, the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal and the payout control unit 600 outputs the payout information signal twice, and the main control unit 300 outputs the first payout schedule information signal. The output period of the high-level signal of the above and a part of the output period of the high-level signal of the first payout information signal by the payout control unit 600 overlap. With such a configuration, the external device can detect the payout schedule information signal and the payout information signal at the same time, and by calculating the logical sum and the logical product of the two, it is possible to acquire new information that has never existed before. In some cases.

Further, the first payout information signal and the second payout information signal output by the payout control unit 600 are larger than the interval Tc between the first payout schedule information signal and the second payout schedule information signal output by the main control unit 300. The interval Td is set long. With such a configuration, the external device may be able to easily distinguish between the payout schedule information signal and the payout information signal depending on the difference between the output interval of the payout schedule information signal and the output interval of the payout information signal.

In this example, since the total number of prize balls is 24 and the predetermined number is 10 or more in the serial command management process, the main control unit 300 subtracts the predetermined number 10 from the total number of prize balls 24 to obtain the total number of prize balls. Is updated to 14, and the number of output requests is updated to 1, and since the total number of prize balls after subtraction is 14 and the predetermined number is 10 or more, the predetermined number 10 is subtracted from the total number of prize balls 14 again. The number of prize balls has been updated to 4, and the number of output requests has been updated to 2, but the number is not limited to this example.

Therefore, for example, in the N (N is a positive integer) th serial command management process, the main control unit 300 subtracts a predetermined number 10 from the total number of prize balls 24, updates the total number of prize balls to 14, and outputs the total number of prize balls. After updating the number of requests to 1, the serial command management process is terminated once, the first payout information signal is output in the external output signal setting process, and then the total number of prize balls in the N + 1th and subsequent serial command management processes. After subtracting a predetermined number 10 from 14 to update the total number of prize balls to 4 and updating the number of output requests to 1, the second payout information signal may be output in the external output signal setting process. That is, instead of updating the number of output requests in one serial command management process, the number of output requests may be updated in a plurality of serial command management processes.

With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the processing time of the serial command management process varies depending on the number of prize balls, and the output timing of the payout information signal is not delayed and is stable. Game control may be possible.

<External terminal board signal output example 3>
FIG. 80 is a time chart showing an output example 3 of the external terminal board signal. Here, the "symbol-related signal" in the figure shows the waveform of the symbol confirmation number information signal (external terminal board signal 3) output by the main control unit 300, but other start port information signals (external terminal board). It is also possible to replace it with any of the signal 4) and the jackpot information 1 to 4 signals (external terminal board signals 5 to 8) (the same applies to the examples described below).

In this example, the main control unit 300 outputs a high-level signal as a payout schedule information signal and outputs a high-level signal as a symbol-related signal in the Nth (N is a positive integer) external output signal setting process. It is outputting. After that, in the N + 1th and subsequent external output signal setting processes, a low-level signal is output as a payout schedule information signal, and a high-level signal is output as a symbol-related signal. That is, a high level signal is output for the same period as the payout schedule information signal and the symbol-related signal.

With such a configuration, the external device can simultaneously detect the payout schedule information signal and the symbol-related signal, and by calculating the logical sum and the logical product of the two, it is possible to acquire new information that has never existed before. In some cases.

<External terminal board signal output example 4>
FIG. 81 is a time chart showing an output example 4 of the external terminal board signal. In this example, the main control unit 300 sets the number of output requests to 1 or more and turns on the specific abnormality detection flag (for example, detects a magnetic abnormality) in the Nth (N is a positive integer) external output signal setting process. In this case, the payout schedule information signal is output by outputting the payout schedule information signal in the N + 1th and subsequent external output signal setting processes without outputting the payout schedule information signal in the Nth external output signal setting process. The output is delayed by a predetermined period from the second external output signal setting process.

On the other hand, in the Nth external output signal setting process, the main control unit 300 performs the external output signal setting process when the number of output requests is 1 or more and the specific abnormality detection flag is on (for example, magnetic abnormality is detected). Is configured so that the symbol-related signal is not output and the symbol-related signal is not output even in the external output signal setting processing after the N + 1th time.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the outside that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 100, and it may be possible to prevent fraudulent acts. In this example, the symbol-related signal is not output when the specific abnormality detection flag is turned on. However, as with the payout schedule information signal, the output is configured to be delayed from the original output timing. In some cases, the same effect can be obtained.

<External terminal board signal output example 5>
FIG. 82 is a time chart showing an output example 5 of the external terminal board signal. In this example, the number of prize balls by winning the variable winning opening 234 is set to 10.

In this example, since the main control unit 300 detects the winning of the variable winning opening 234, in the winning opening counter update process (step S216), the number of winning balls is stored in the prize ball number storage area corresponding to the variable winning opening 234. In the serial command management process (step S219), a prize ball command including information on the number of payout requests (= number of prize balls 10) is transmitted to the payout control unit 600. Further, the main control unit 300 determines in the serial command management process (step S219) whether or not the total number of prize balls is 10 or more, and if applicable, subtracts 10 from the total number of prize balls. , Add 1 to the number of output requests. In this example, since the total number of prize balls is 10 and the predetermined number is 10 or more, the total number of prize balls is updated to 0 by subtracting the predetermined number 10 from the total number of prize balls 10, and the output request number is updated to 1. ..

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 outputs the payout schedule information signal once when the number of output requests is 1 or more in the external output signal setting process (step S235). In this example, the number of output requests is 1. Therefore, in the external output signal setting process (step S235), a high-level signal is output as the payout schedule information signal over a predetermined period.

That is, in this example, the number of winning balls by winning the variable winning opening 234 (10 in this example) and the threshold value (10 in this example) that is a condition for adding the number of output requests are set to be the same. The number of output requests is updated to 1 in one serial command management process, and a high-level signal is output as a payout schedule information signal in the subsequent external output signal setting process.

In this way, if the number of winning balls by winning a specific winning opening and the threshold value that is a condition for adding the number of output requests are set to be the same, each time a specific winning opening is won, the payout is made. Since the schedule information signal can be output once, it is possible to estimate the number of winnings to a specific winning opening. For example, when the number of winnings per unit time exceeds a predetermined number, it is determined as abnormal. Appropriate processing (for example, error notification) may be possible.

<External terminal board signal output example 6>
FIG. 83 is a time chart showing an output example 6 of the external terminal board signal. In this example, the main control unit 300 detects the winning of the variable winning opening 234 twice, so that it is used as the first payout schedule information signal in the N (N is a positive integer) third external output signal setting process. After outputting a high-level signal for a predetermined period Ta, a high-level signal is output for a predetermined period as the second payout schedule information signal in the N + 1th and subsequent external output signal setting processes after the elapse of the predetermined period Tc. ..

On the other hand, at the timing when the payout control unit 600 determines in the signal output process (step S711) that the value of the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is a predetermined number (10 in this example) or more. The payout information signal is output once for a predetermined period of time Tb.

In this example, a part of the output period of the high level signal of the second payout information signal by the main control unit 300 and the output period of the high level signal of the first payout information signal by the payout control unit 600 overlap. .. With such a configuration, the external device can detect the second payout schedule information signal and the first payout information signal at the same time, and by calculating the logical sum and the logical product of both, there is no conventional method. You may be able to get new information.

<External terminal board signal output example 7>
FIG. 84 is a time chart showing an output example 7 of the external terminal board signal, FIG. 84A is an extracted part of the time chart of FIG. 79, and FIG. 84B is the same figure (b). It is a time chart when it is judged that the specific abnormality detection flag is on in the example shown in a).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the main control unit 300 has an output request number of 1 or more and a specific abnormality detection flag on (for example, detecting a magnetic abnormality) in the external output signal setting process. In this case, it is configured not to output the payout schedule information signal. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the outside that some abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 100, and it may be possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

<External terminal board signal output example 8>
FIG. 85 is a time chart showing an output example 8 of an external terminal board signal, FIG. 85 (a) is an extracted part of a time chart in a normal state, and FIG. It is a time chart.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the main control unit 300 has an output request number of 1 or more and a specific abnormality detection flag on (for example, detecting a magnetic abnormality) in the external output signal setting process. In this case, the payout schedule information signal is not output, but the security information signal is output. On the other hand, at the timing when the payout control unit 600 determines in the signal output process (step S1708) that the value of the payout number information of the payout number storage unit for external output at the time of payout is a predetermined number (10 in this example) or more. The payout information signal is output.

With such a configuration, even if the security information signal cannot be output to the external device due to disconnection or the like, the external device can use the payout schedule information signal from the main control unit 300 and the payout information signal from the payout control unit 600. Based on the information in, it may be possible to grasp the presence or absence of abnormalities related to withdrawals. In addition, the external device can detect the security signal and the payout information signal at the same time, and may be able to acquire new information that has never existed before by calculating the logical sum or the logical product of the two. When outputting the security information signal, the payout schedule information signal may be output at a timing delayed by a predetermined time from the output timing of the payout schedule information signal when the security information signal is not output.

<Embodiment 3>
Hereinafter, the pachinko machine (game table) according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that FIGS. 86 to 89 and the reference numerals thereof are used only for the description in the third embodiment.

FIG. 86 shows an example of power supply between the power supply board 182, the payout board 170, and the main board 156 described above. In the example shown in FIG. 86 (a), the power supply line pl01 and the power supply line pl02 are pulled out from the power supply board 182 provided with the power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric gaming devices, and the power supply line pl01 and the power supply line pl02 are Both are connected to a payout board (payout control board) 170 including a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls. After a certain period of time has passed after the power is turned on, a DC (direct current) 12V voltage is applied to the power supply line pl01, and a direct current voltage different from DC12V is applied to the power supply line pl02. A power supply line pl03 is drawn out from the payout board 170, and the power supply line pl03 is connected to a main board (main control board) 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game. The power supply line pl03 is connected to the power supply line pl01 in the payout board 170. Therefore, after a certain period of time has passed after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC12V is supplied from the power supply board 182 to the main board 156 via the payout board 170. It should be noted that these voltage values are examples, and it is of course possible to apply a voltage having a voltage value different from these depending on the circuit to be driven.

In the example shown in FIG. 86 (b), the power supply line pl04, the power supply line pl05, and the power supply line pl06 are drawn out from the power supply board 182. The power line pl04 is connected to the main board 156. Both the power supply line pl05 and the power supply line pl06 are connected to the payout board 170. After a certain period of time has passed after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC12V is applied to the power supply line pl04 and the power supply line pl05, and a DC voltage different from DC12V is applied to the power supply line pl06. That is, after a certain period of time has passed after the power is turned on, the voltage of DC12V is directly supplied from the power supply board 182 to the main board 156 without going through the payout board 170.

In the example shown in FIG. 86 (c), the power supply line pl07, the power supply line pl08, the power supply line pl09, and the power supply line pl10 are drawn out from the power supply board 182. The power supply line pl07 and the power supply line pl08 are connected to the main board 156. Both the power supply line pl09 and the power supply line pl10 are connected to the payout board 170. After a certain period of time has passed after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC12V is applied to the power supply line pl07 and the power supply line pl09, a voltage of DC5V is applied to the power supply line pl08, and a DC voltage different from DC5V / 12V is applied to the power supply line pl10. Will be done. That is, after a certain period of time has passed after the power is turned on, two types of voltages, DC5V and DC12V, are directly supplied from the power supply board 182 to the main board 156 without going through the payout board 170.

FIG. 87 shows an example of power supply in the main board 156. In this example, the configuration shown in FIG. 86 (a) will be used for description. The power supply line pl03 drawn out from the payout board 170 is drawn into the main board 156 and connected to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter 7001. The DC-DC converter 7001 has a function of converting the voltage of DC12V applied to the power supply line pl03 to DC5V. The DC5V voltage generated by the DC-DC converter 7001 is applied to the power supply line pl11.

A plurality of branch lines are connected to the power supply line pl11, and a predetermined branch line is connected to the power supply terminal A of the reset IC 7003. After a certain period of time has passed after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC5V is applied to the power supply terminal A as a drive voltage, whereby the reset IC 7003 is driven. Further, another branch line branched from the power supply line pl11 is connected to the power supply terminal F of the microcomputer (CPU) 304. After a certain period of time has passed after the power is turned on, a voltage of DC5V is applied to the power supply terminal F as a driving voltage of the microcomputer 304. The drive voltages of the reset IC 7003 and the microcomputer 304 may not be the same but may be different. Further, the voltage value itself of the drive voltage of the reset IC 7003 or the microcomputer 304 and the voltage value of the voltage applied to the power supply line pl11 may not be the same but may be different.

The signal input terminal B of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the power supply line pl11 via another branch line. The reset IC 7003 monitors the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B to grasp the state of the drive voltage of the microcomputer 304 applied to the terminal F of the microcomputer 304. On the other hand, the signal input terminal C of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the power supply line pl03 via a predetermined branch line. The reset IC 7003 monitors the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C to grasp the state of the voltage applied to the power supply line pl03.

The reset IC 7003 is provided with at least two signal output terminals D and E. A reset signal (startup signal) is output from the signal output terminal D, and a low voltage signal is output from the signal output terminal E. If the reset IC 7003 determines that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B does not exceed the operation guarantee voltage (for example, 4.5 V) of the microcomputer 304, the reset IC 7003 negates (invalidates) the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D. To. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B exceeds the operation guarantee voltage of the microcomputer 304, the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D is asserted (enabled). That is, when the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal B does not exceed the operation guarantee voltage (for example, 4.5V) of the microcomputer 304, the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D becomes a negate state, and the signal input terminal When the terminal voltage of B exceeds the guaranteed operation voltage of the microcomputer 304, the reset signal output to the signal output terminal D is in the asserted state. The number of terminals of the reset IC 7003 is arbitrary, and the one shown in the figure is an example. Only the terminals necessary for explanation are shown, and the number of terminals and the arrangement position may be the same as those shown in the figure. It does not have to be the same.

The signal output terminal D of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the signal input terminal G of the microcomputer 304 via the signal line pl12. The signal input terminal G is used as a system reset (XSRST) terminal. Therefore, when the reset signal output to the signal line pl12 is in the asserted state, the microcomputer 304 shifts to the security mode. As described above, in the reset IC 7003, the signal output terminal D functions as the reset signal output terminal and plays a role as the start signal output circuit 340 shown in FIG.

When the reset IC 7003 determines that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C does not exceed a predetermined voltage value (for example, 9V), the reset IC 7003 puts the low voltage signal output to the signal output terminal E into an assert state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C exceeds a predetermined voltage value, the low voltage signal output to the signal output terminal E is negated.

The signal output terminal E of the reset IC 7003 is connected to the signal input terminal H of the microcomputer 304 via the signal line pl13. The signal input terminal H is used as any one of the data terminals D0 to D7. For example, the microcomputer 304 repeats the processes of step S103 and step S105 of FIG. 84, for example, until the low voltage signal output to the signal line pl13 becomes negated. As described above, in the reset IC 7003, the signal output terminal E functions as a constant voltage signal output terminal and plays a role as the voltage monitoring circuit 338 shown in FIG.

In this example, the predetermined threshold voltage value of the signal input terminal C when the low voltage signal on the signal line pl13 changes from the assert state to the negate state (or vice versa) is set to 9V, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a voltage is applied to the power supply terminal F so that the microcomputer 304 can continue the power interruption processing during the period required from the power interruption detection in the main control unit timer interrupt processing steps S239 and S243 to the power interruption processing described above. good. The DC5V voltage output from the DC-DC converter 7001 to the power supply line pl11 gradually starts to decrease when the DC12V voltage of the power supply line pl03 input to the DC-DC converter 7001 drops to about 7V. Therefore, when the terminal voltage of the signal input terminal C becomes less than a predetermined voltage value (for example, 9 V), the low voltage signal output to the signal output terminal E is changed from the negate state to the assert state. If, for example, 9V is used as the predetermined voltage value, even if the voltage of the power supply line pl11 gradually decreases, the microcomputer during the period required from the power failure detection to the power failure processing in steps S239 and step S243 of the main control unit timer interrupt processing. 304 can continue to operate.

FIG. 88 shows an example of power supply in the power supply board 182 and the main board 156. Explaining in comparison with the power supply configuration shown in FIG. 87, the DC-DC converter 7001 and the reset IC 7003 arranged in the main board 156 in FIG. 87 are arranged on the power supply board 182 in the configuration shown in FIG. 88. There is. As a result, the power supply line pl11 and the signal lines pl12 and pl13 are wired so as to straddle between the power supply board 182 and the main board 156. According to such a configuration, all the power supplies of DC5V, DC12V, and other voltage values can be supplied by the power supply board 182, so that it is not necessary to provide a power supply circuit on the main board 156 or the payout board 170, and the board. It may be possible to allow some margin in the circuit layout above.

FIG. 89 shows an example of power supply in the main board 156. FIG. 89A shows a state in which the branch line of the power supply line pl11 is connected to the external masqueradable interrupt terminal XINT and the external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI of the CPU 304, and a voltage of DC5V is constantly applied to both terminals XINT and XNMI. ing. By doing so, the interrupt signals input to both terminals XINT and XNMI always maintain a negated state, so that malfunction due to noise or the like can be reliably prevented when an external interrupt by the interrupt terminals is not used. The configuration shown in FIG. 89B illustrates a case where the terminal H of the CPU 304 in the configuration shown in FIG. 87 functions as an external non-maskable interrupt terminal XNMI. The sign X of the interrupt terminal indicates low activity, and the L signal is input to enter the assert state. However, in the case of a circuit that is high active and enters the assert state, the L signal (for example, 0V) is always input. To do so.

<Receive command processing, reception command acquisition processing, reception command analysis processing (details)>
The details of the received command process, the received command acquisition process, and the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 97.

90 and 91 are diagrams showing an example of a receive command buffer area provided in the second area 708B of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600.

As shown in FIG. 90, the reception command buffer area is provided as a ring buffer that uses a storage area (buffer) having a fixed length (here, addresses 00H to 03H) in a ring shape and stores data in the buffer. Here, the storage area of addresses 00H to 03H is illustrated as the size of the buffer, but the size of the buffer is not limited to this. In the receive command buffer area, data (value of the receive command) is set and analyzed using a data write pointer (setting pointer) and a data read pointer (analysis pointer) as shown in the figure. When both pointers reach the end of the buffer (here the bottom layer), they are rotated back to the beginning of the buffer (here the top layer). In this way, the data is processed conceptually as if it were a ring, and the data overflows with only the actual area (fixed-length buffer area) and two pointer variables (setting pointer and analysis pointer). It is possible to realize buffer management without any problems.

FIG. 90 is an example in which the value of the setting pointer directly indicates the address of the storage area. First, as shown in FIG. 6A, both the setting pointer and the analysis pointer refer to the position of the start address (00H) of the reception command buffer area. In the ring buffer, the read pointer (analysis pointer) reads data from the position currently referred to, but when the write pointer (setting pointer) and the reference address match, the reading of the data is terminated (waiting). That is, in the state of FIG. 3A, since the positions of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are the same, the CUP of the payout control unit 600 is waiting for reading data.

In this state, when the payout control unit 600 receives the first receive command (for example, 2AH (prize ball command instructing 10 ball payout) from the main control unit 300), the value of the receive command (for example, the value of the receive command (00H) at the position (00H) of the setting pointer) 2AH) is written (Fig. (B)), and the setting pointer moves to the next address (01H) (Fig. 90 (c)). In FIGS. 90 and 91, the value of the received command is a hexadecimal number. The "H" indicating "H" is omitted.

Since the setting pointer and the analysis pointer refer to different addresses, the analysis pointer starts reading data. That is, the analysis pointer refers to the value (2AH in this case) stored at the first address (00H), analyzes the content of the received command from the value, and jumps to the corresponding module (Fig. (C)). .. After the value is read by the analysis pointer, the storage area referenced by the analysis pointer is cleared (Fig. (D)), and the analysis pointer moves to the next address (01H) (Fig. (E)). The data may be read after incrementing the value of the analysis pointer.

Next, when a reception command (for example, a prize ball command instructing the payout of 3 balls) is received, the value (23H) of the reception command is written at the position (01H) of the setting pointer (Fig. (F)) and set. The pointer moves to the next address (02H) (Fig. (G)). When the next reception command (for example, a prize ball command instructing 15 ball payout) is received, the pointer moves to the position of the setting pointer (02H). The value of the receive command (2FH) is written (Fig. (H)), and the setting pointer moves to the next address (03H) (Fig. (I)). The analysis pointer is stored at the current address (01H). Refers to the value (23H in this case), analyzes the content of the received command from the value, jumps to the corresponding module (Fig. (I)), and then clears the storage area referenced by the analysis pointer. (Fig. (J)). When the storage area referenced by the analysis pointer is cleared, the analysis pointer moves to the next address (02H) (Fig. (K)), and (the position of the setting pointer does not match). The buffer value (2FH) is read and analyzed. After that, the storage area referenced by the analysis pointer is cleared (Fig. (L)), and the analysis pointer moves to the next address (03H) (Fig. 3H). (M)).

In the state of FIG. 3M, since the reference addresses of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer match, the analysis pointer waits for data to be read. When the next receive command (for example, 23H) is received, the value (23H) of the receive command is written at the position (03H) of the setting pointer (Fig. (N)), and the setting pointer moves to the next address (00H). (Fig. (O)). The analysis pointer reads the value 23H of the current address 03H and performs analysis (Fig. (O)). The data is written and read in the same manner.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing another example of the received command buffer area. In the example shown in the figure, the position (its value) referred to by the setting pointer and the analysis pointer is different from the address of the storage area where the data is actually stored. That is, the address where the data is stored is calculated based on the position (its value) referred to by the setting pointer and the analysis pointer, and the data is written and read.

With reference to FIG. 90A, an area from addresses 7F10H to 7F13H is secured as a reception command buffer area in which reception commands are stored. On the other hand, the setting pointer is stored in the address 7F0EH of the RAM 708, for example, and the analysis pointer is stored in the address 7F0FH of the RAM 708, for example. ..

That is, in the state of the figure, the value 00H at the beginning of both the setting pointer and the analysis pointer is set, and no data is stored in the reception command buffer area.

In this state, when the payout control unit 600 receives the first reception command (for example, 2AH) from the main control unit 300, a predetermined arithmetic process is performed based on the value (00H) set in the setting pointer, and the reception command is received. The value (7F10H) of the start address of the buffer area is calculated. Then, the reception command (2AH) is stored at the address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area (Fig. (B)). Then, after the reception command is stored, the position of the setting pointer is updated (incremented) and moved to the next address. The analysis pointer performs a predetermined arithmetic process based on the set value (00H), and calculates the value (7F10H) of the start address of the reception command buffer area. Then, the data (2AH) at the address 7F10H in the reception command buffer area is read and analyzed (Fig. (C)). After that, the address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area is cleared (Fig. (D)), the analysis pointer is updated, and the value of the next address is set (Fig. (E)). In this state, when the payout control unit 600 receives the next reception command (for example, 23H) from the main control unit 300, a predetermined arithmetic process is performed based on the value (01H) set in the setting pointer, and the reception command is received. The value (7F11H) of the start address of the buffer area is calculated, and the reception command (23H) is stored in the address 7F11H (Fig. (F)). After that, the setting pointer refers to the next address, the analysis pointer performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the set value (01H), the address 7F11H of the reception command buffer area is calculated, and the stored data ( 23H) is acquired and analyzed. After that, the same process is repeated to store and analyze the data.

The values set in the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are actually 0 to 15 (4 bits), and the values are updated by the increment function. The setting pointer and the analysis pointer are 8 bits, but since the operation result of the logical product of the set value (4 bits 0 to 15) and 0FH is set in the pointer, it should be circulated in the range of 0 to 15. Becomes possible.

<Structure of storage area>
FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b) are schematic views showing a partial configuration of a storage area used in the received command process, the received command acquisition process, and the received command analysis process of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 92 (c) is an example of a command (received command) transmitted by the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600.

FIG. 92 (a) is a schematic view of the status register 772 and the received data register 774, which are a part of the built-in registers of the payout control microcomputer 770 (see FIG. 81). Information indicating the status of the serial communication circuit is stored in the status register 772, and the reception command is stored in the reception data register 774. Although it is shown here as a reception data register 774 that stores a command received by the payout control unit 600, it may be a transmission / reception data register that stores transmission / reception data.

FIG. 92B is a schematic view showing the configuration of the second area 708B of the RAM 708 of the payout control unit 600. As shown in the figure, the second area 708B is composed of, for example, the areas from addresses 7F0EH to 7F13H, the address 7F0EH is the setting pointer storage area 7081, and the address 7F0FH is the analysis pointer storage area 7082. Addresses 7F10H to 7F13H are reception command buffer areas (ring buffers) 708R.

The reception command shown in FIG. 6C is stored in the reception command buffer area 708R. Since the content of FIG. 89 (c) is the same as that shown in FIG. 89 (b), the description thereof will be omitted.

<Receive command processing (details)>
An example of receiving command processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 93. As described above, the receive command process is a process performed in step S404 of the payout control unit interrupt process (FIG. 70). Further, in the following description, as shown in FIG. 89, a case where the address of the received command buffer area is indirectly calculated and referred to based on the values of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer is shown as an example. That is, in the initial state, the values of the setting pointer and the analysis pointer are both 00H, and the area where the data is first stored is the address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area.

First, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 refers to the specific bit of the status register 772 and reads the received data (reception command) from the reception data register 774 when "reception is completed" (1).

As an example, the storage destination of the reception command is obtained based on the value of the setting pointer storage area 7081 and the start address of the reception command buffer area 708R. That is, the start address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area 708R is added to the value (01H) of the setting pointer storage area 7081 (address 7F0EH) to calculate the storage destination address 7F11H (2). The CPU of the payout control unit 600 stores the receive command of the receive data register 774 at the address 7F11H of the receive command buffer area 708R (3). When the receive command is read from the receive data register 774, the specific bit of the status register 772 is cleared. Further, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 updates (increments) the value of the setting pointer (4).

The CPU of the payout control unit 600 may store the receive command of the receive data register 774 in the address 7F11H of the receive command buffer area 708R and clear the specific bit of the status register 772.

<Receive command acquisition process (details)>
An example of the received command acquisition process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 94. The reception command acquisition process is a process performed in step S309 of the payout control unit main process.

First, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 compares the value of the setting pointer storage area 7081 (here 02H) with the value of the analysis pointer storage area 7082 (here 01H) (1), and these values do not match. If, the analysis is performed. As an example, the storage destination of the data to be analyzed (received command) is obtained based on the value of the analysis pointer storage area 7082 and the start address of the received command buffer area 708R. That is, the value of the analysis pointer (01H in this case) and the start address 7F10H of the reception command buffer area 708R are added to calculate the storage destination address 7F11H (2). The CPU of the payout control unit 600 stores the data stored in the address 7F11H of the reception command buffer area 708R in another area (for example, A register 722) and clears the data of the address 7F11H of the reception command buffer area 708R. (3). Further, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 updates (increments) the value of the analysis pointer (4).

After that, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 analyzes the type of the received command (whether it is a prize ball command or a communication confirmation command) stored in the A register 722, and jumps to the corresponding module.

<Received command analysis processing>
An example of the received command analysis process will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 95 to 97. The received command analysis process is a process performed in step S309 of the payout control unit main process.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a relationship between an example of received command data and a jump table. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a bit-wise setting example (contents) of a received command, and FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an example of a jump table.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the received command is 8-bit data, the upper 4 bits indicate the command type, and the lower 4 bits indicate the actual data. For example, when the value of the upper 4 bits is "1", it is the main control communication confirmation command, and when the value of the actual data part of the lower 4 bits is "0", it indicates that it is the initial startup, and the lower 4 bits. When the value of the 4-bit actual data part is "1", it indicates that the return is started. Further, for example, when the value of the upper 4 bits is "2", it is a prize ball command, and when the value of the actual data part of the lower 4 bits is "3", it indicates that 3 balls are paid out. When the value of the actual data part of the lower 4 bits is "10", it indicates that 10 balls are paid out, and when the value of the actual data part of the lower 4 bits is "15", it means that 15 balls are paid out. show. The command type of the upper 4 bits and the actual data of the lower 4 bits are temporarily saved separately, which will be described later.

FIG. 3B shows an example of a jump table. The jump table is provided in the ROM control area of the ROM 706 of the payout control unit 600, and the lower 8 bits (or the upper 8 bits) of the start address 0750H of the main control communication confirmation command reception process (program) are set at the address 0700H. The upper 8 bits (or lower 8 bits) of the start address (here, 0750H) of the main control communication confirmation command reception process are stored in the 0701H. Further, the lower 8 bits (or upper 8 bits) of the start address (here, 0780H) of the processing (program) at the time of receiving the prize ball number command is stored in the address 0702H, and the lower 8 bits (or the upper 8 bits) are stored in the address 0703H when the prize ball number command is received. The upper 8 bits (or lower 8 bits) of the processing start address 0780H are stored.

The CPU of the payout control unit 600 analyzes the upper 4 bits of the prize ball command, and in the case of "1", refers to the address 0700H of the jump table in the figure (b), and processes when the main control communication confirmation command is received. Jump to the start address (0750H in this case). Further, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 analyzes the upper 4 bits of the prize ball command, and in the case of "2", refers to the address 0702H of the jump table in the figure (b) and processes when the prize ball number command is received. Jumps to the start address of (here, 0780H).

96 and 97 are diagrams showing details of the received command analysis process, and are diagrams showing an analysis example of the received command stored in the A register in FIG. 94 (3).

FIG. 96A shows a case where “00100011” is stored in the A register as, for example, a prize ball command (23H) for instructing the payout of three balls. First, the CPU of the payout control unit 600 saves the value of the A register in the B register in order to determine the command type later. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is turned off in step S1403 of FIG. 108 (b), the process is terminated without storing the received command in the buffer. When the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is turned off in step S706 of FIG. 109, the process ends without performing the prize ball command reception processing. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (a) (after the prize ball command is stored in the buffer), it is analyzed that the prize ball command is a prize ball command by referring to the upper 4 bits, and the prize ball command cannot be accepted (prize ball command). If the acceptance permission flag is off), the command may be discarded and the process may be terminated. Further, even if a command other than the main control communication confirmation command and the prize ball command is discarded, or an unintended prize ball command is discarded by turning off the prize ball command acceptance permission flag, the main control unit 300 is notified. It is not necessary to send that it is an error.

Next, as shown in FIG. 6B, the logical product of the A register value “00100011” and 0FH (“000001111”) is calculated in order to acquire the value of the lower 4 bits of the A register and stored in the A register. Store. As a result, the upper 4 bits of the value of the A register are masked and only the value of the actual data portion becomes (“000000111”).

Next, as shown in the figure (c), the value (actual data part) of the A register is saved in the C register, and then, as shown in the figure (d), the value of the B register is used for determining the command type. The value "00100011" is stored (returned) in the A register. The order of the comparison processing of the actual data part and the return processing for determining the command type may be reversed.

Next, as shown in the figure (e), in order to acquire the value of the upper 4 bits of the A register, the logical product of the A register value "00100011" and F0H ("11110,000") is calculated and stored in the A register. Store. As a result, the lower 4 bits of the value of the A register are masked, and only the value indicating the command type (“00100000”) is obtained.

Subsequently, in FIG. 97 (a), the value of the A register is shifted to the right four times. As a result, the value of the A register becomes "00000010" in the case of the prize ball command as shown in the figure (in the case of the main control communication confirmation command, it becomes "00000001").

In the figure (b), the value of the A register is subtracted (decremented) to obtain "00000001" in order to calculate the offset. Then, as shown in FIG. 6C, the decremented value of the A register is compared with a specific value (here, for example, 02H) (CP 02H instruction). At this timing, the value of the A register (after decrementing) is usually 00H or 01H, so if a carry occurs, it is a normal command, and if a carry does not occur, it is an unintended command. Can be judged. Therefore, if carry does not occur, the process is terminated as an unintended command. The comparison with a specific value may be performed before the subtraction process.

Next, in FIG. 9D, the start address 0700H of the jump table shown in FIG. 95B is stored in the HL register (pair register) 724 of the payout control unit 600.

Next, as shown in the figure (e), the value "000000010" which is double the value of the A register in the figure (b) is added to the value of the HL register and stored in the added HL register. Jump to the address you are in (move to the module). The jump to the address stored in the HL register is performed by, for example, a "JP (HL) instruction". In this example, the jump is made to the address 0780H stored in the address 0702H of the jump table, and the processing at the time of receiving the prize ball number command is executed.

Further, although not shown, when the reception command is the main control communication confirmation command, the value of the A register in FIG. 6B is "00000000000". That is, in the figure (e), the double value of the A register value added to the HL register is also "00000000000", and the jump is made to the address 0750H stored in the address 0700H of the jump table, and the main control communication confirmation command is used. Receiving processing is executed.

If the process shifts to the process when the prize ball number command is received after FIG. 96 (e), the actual data portion saved in the C register in FIG. 96 (c) becomes the prize ball number. In step S1102 of FIG. 111 (a) or step S1203 of FIG. 111 (b), a process of adding to the next prize ball number area is performed. Although no fraudulent countermeasures have been taken for the number of prize balls, as a countermeasure against fraudulent numbers of prize balls, a process of referring to the actual data portion (lower 4 bits) saved in the C register may be performed.

Although the reception command processing, the reception command acquisition processing, and the reception command analysis processing have been described above, the transmission command processing (step S412 in FIG. 70) and the transmission command output processing (step S311 in FIG. 106) are the above-mentioned reception command processing. , At least one or more of the received command acquisition process and the received command analysis process may be executed in the same manner.

Although the main control communication confirmation command is periodically transmitted to the payout control unit 600, it may be transmitted only before the prize ball command is transmitted. In that case, only the first main control communication confirmation command is transmitted to the prize ball. It may be sent separately from the command. Further, for example, one main control communication confirmation command may be transmitted for each prize ball command transmission. Further, one transmission may be performed for each interrupt of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, or a plurality of transmissions may be performed for each interrupt, a group unit may be transmitted for each interrupt, and a plurality of transmissions may be performed for each interrupt within a range not exceeding 255. ..

In addition, when sending and receiving a prize ball command when a prize ball is generated, if information about the state of the device or the like is transmitted and received, the amount of communication increases too much, so that the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 periodically When sending and receiving a communication confirmation command to, the payout control unit 600 may send and receive information on the state of the device and the like at the timing of sending and receiving the communication confirmation command.

Further, when the main control communication confirmation command is not received, the command related to the error may not be transmitted to the main control unit 300. In this case, some errors may be transmitted by using an error command, such as transmitting an error of a predetermined type.

Further, when the main control communication confirmation command is received, a plurality of types of commands may be transmitted to the main control unit 300 at different timings (for example, different main processes). For example, when a plurality of types of commands are transmitted at the same time, for example, the upper 4 bits of the error command may be sent in ascending order, or the upper 4 bits may be sent in ascending order. Further, since the prize ball command is an important command related to the prize ball, the command may be encrypted.

Further, the flow of each process described in the above embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the figure as long as the same function can be obtained, and the process order can be changed as appropriate.

Alternatively, the payout control unit main process may execute the receive command process (step S404), and the payout control unit interrupt process may execute the command analysis process (step S309), or the payout control unit main process may execute the receive command process. (Step S404) and the command analysis process (step S309) may be executed, or the receive command process (step S404) and the command analysis process (step S309) may be executed by the payout control unit interrupt process. good.

In the prize ball command reception processing, in the reception command processing (step S404) in the payout control unit interrupt processing (FIG. 70), the prize ball command acceptance permission flag determination processing (step S1403 in FIG. 108 (b)) Even if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag is off, if the prize ball command acceptance permission flag in this step is on, the process proceeds to the next step S1203. That is, even if the payout control unit interrupt processing determines that the command is invalid, it may be processed as a normal reception command in this step.

<Data table of main control unit>
Next, the data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

<Table for determining whether or not the special figure is correct>
FIG. 98 (a) shows an example of a low-probability state table for determining whether or not a special figure is correct (Special Figure 1), and FIG. 98 (b) is a high-probability state table for determining whether or not a special figure is correct (Special Figure 1). An example is shown. Further, FIG. 3C shows an example of a low-probability state table for determining whether or not a special figure is correct (Special Figure 2), and FIG. 2D is a high-probability state table for determining whether or not a special figure is correct (Special Figure 2). ) Is shown as an example.

In these special figure hit / fail judgment tables, the presence / absence of special figure probability change (special figure high probability state or special figure low probability state), lottery value data for special figure big hit judgment, and the result of winning / failing of the special figure fluctuation game are displayed. It is associated and stored. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines that the hit / fail determination table, the presence / absence of the special figure probability change, and that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure start port 230 (or the second special figure start port 232). Based on the special figure winning random number value acquired when the ball detection sensor detects it, a jackpot determination for determining the winning / failing result of the special figure 1 variable game (or the special figure 2 variable game) is performed.

<Special figure hit / fail judgment table / Special figure 1 Big hit judgment of variable game>
In the case of the special figure low probability state (no special figure probability change) in the jackpot judgment of the special figure 1 variable game, refer to the special figure hit / miss judgment low probability state table (special figure 1) shown in the same figure (a). When the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (big hit), and information indicating that the big hit flag is stored in the storage area of the big hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. (Hereinafter, setting the jackpot information in the jackpot flag storage area is referred to as "setting the jackpot flag on"). Further, when the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10220 to 10384, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit), and the small hit flag storage area provided in the RAM 308 is hit. Set the information to be shown (hereinafter, setting the small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as "setting the small hit flag on").

Further, when the acquired special figure winning random number value is a numerical value of 0 to 10000 or 10385 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is out of order, and the above-mentioned jackpot flag and small hit flag storage area is deviated. Set the information indicating that (hereinafter, setting the information of the loss in the storage area of the big hit flag is called "setting the big hit flag to off", and the information of the loss is set in the storage area of the small hit flag. Setting is called "setting the small hit flag off").

In the present embodiment, the numerical range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the size of the numerical range is 65536), and the numerical range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure low probability state is 10001 to 10219 (numerical range). Since the size of is 219), the winning probability of the big hit of the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit in the special figure low probability state. Since the numerical range of the lottery value data is 10220 to 10384 (the size of the numerical range is 164), the winning probability of the small hit of the special figure variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/399 (= 165/65536). ).

In addition, in the case of a special figure high probability state (with special figure probability change) in the jackpot judgment of the special figure 1 variable game, refer to the special figure hit / miss judgment high probability state table (special figure 1) shown in the same figure (b). Then, when the acquired special figure winning random value is 10001 to 12185, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (big hit), and the big hit flag is set to ON. If the acquired special figure winning random number values are 12186 to 12349, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game has been won (small hit), and the small hit flag is set to ON. Further, when the acquired special figure winning random number value is a numerical value of 0 to 10000 or 12350 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is out of order, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set to off.

In the present embodiment, the numerical range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the size of the numerical range is 65536), and the numerical range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure high probability state is 10001 to 12185 (numerical range). Since the size of is 2185), the winning probability of the big hit of the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit in the special figure high probability state. Since the numerical range of the lottery value data is 12186 to 12349 (the size of the numerical range is 164), the winning probability of the small hit of the special figure variable game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/399 (= 163/65536). ). Therefore, in the special figure 1 variable game, the winning probability of the small hit of the special figure variable game in the special figure high probability state is almost the same as the winning probability of the small hit of the special figure variable game in the special figure low probability state. Is set to. In this embodiment, a random number (for example, 10001) that becomes a big hit is set regardless of the lottery probability state of the special figure, but it is set so that the random numbers that become a big hit do not overlap in a plurality of lottery probability states. You may.

<Special figure hit / fail judgment table / Special figure 2 Big hit judgment of variable game>
In the case of the special figure low probability state (no special figure probability change) in the big hit judgment of the special figure 2 variable game, refer to the special figure hit / miss judgment low probability state table (special figure 2) shown in the same figure (c). When the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219, it is determined that the special figure 2 variable game is won (big hit), and the big hit flag is set to ON. Further, when the acquired special figure winning random number value is a numerical value of 0 to 10000 or 10220 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is out of order, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set to off.

In the present embodiment, the numerical range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the size of the numerical range is 65536), and the numerical range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure low probability state is 10001 to 10219 (numerical range). Since the size of is 219), the winning probability of the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/299 (= 219/65536).

Further, in the case of the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability change) in the big hit judgment of the special figure 2 variable game, refer to the special figure hit / miss judgment high probability state table (special figure 1) shown in the same figure (d). Then, when the acquired special figure winning random value is 10001 to 12185, it is determined that the special figure 2 variable game is won (big hit), and the big hit flag is set to ON. Further, when the acquired special figure winning random number value is a numerical value of 0 to 10000 or 12186 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is out of order, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set to off.

In the present embodiment, the numerical range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the size of the numerical range is 65536), and the numerical range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure high probability state is 10001 to 12185 (numerical range). Since the size of is 2185), the winning probability of the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536). In the present embodiment, the small hits are distributed to the special figure 1 and the small hits are not distributed to the special figure 2, but conversely, the small hits may be distributed only to the special figure 2 or distributed to both. Is also good. Moreover, it is not necessary to provide the small hit itself.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine that gives an electronic prize or a medalless slot machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the examples.

The game console according to the present invention may be applied to a game console typified by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Inner frame 140 Ball lending button 142 Return button 144 Switching button 208 Decorative pattern display device 208d Production display area 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 230 1st special figure start port 232 2nd special figure Start port 2321 Blade member 234 Variable winning port 2341 Door member 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
600 Payout control unit 708 RAM

Claims (1)

Notification means capable of notification and
A main control means that can execute multiple types of processing,
A sub-control means capable of controlling the notification means and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of processes is a process related to activation of the sub-control means (hereinafter, referred to as "first process").
One of the plurality of types of processes is a process started after the first process, and is a process of transmitting a command relating to the start start of the sub-control means to the sub-control means ( Hereinafter referred to as "second processing").
One of the plurality of types of processes is a process that is started after the second process when the power is turned on in a state where the set value can be changed, and is a process related to the setting (hereinafter referred to as a process). , "Third process")
One of the plurality of types of processes is a process started after the third process and is composed of a plurality of types of processes including a lottery process (hereinafter, "fourth process"). ".)
The sub-control means is a means capable of executing control to cause the notification means to execute a notification related to the third process (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain notification") based on a command related to the start of activation.
The third process is a process that ends when a certain operation is accepted.
The fourth process, Ri processing der that the third process is started when a certain period has elapsed ended,
One of the plurality of types of processes is a process of updating a random number value used in the lottery process in the fourth process (hereinafter, referred to as a "fifth process").
The fifth process is a process started before the third process.
A game table characterized by that.

Images